VR4 04 GGS-000393-06E NW-SYS-PROV NoRestriction PDF

Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

GGS-000393-06E
January 2017
iPASOLINK VR 4
SET NETWORK AND
SYSTEM PROVISIONING
NEC Corporation
7-1, Shiba 5-Chome, Minato-Ku, Tokyo 108-8001, Japan
GGS-000393-06E
© 2015 – 2017 by NEC Corporation
GGS-000393-06E
Printed in Japan
CONTENTS –i–
iPASOLINK VR 4
SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING
CONTENTS
DOCUMENT WARRANTY i
1. OPERATE WebLCT 1-1
1.1 Conventions Used in this Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2 LCT Communication Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2.1 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2.2 Local Port Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 iPASOLINK Equipment Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.4 Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.5 Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.6 Operating System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.7 Recommended Settings for Browsing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.7.1 Microsoft® Internet Explorer 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.7.2 Mozilla Firefox™ ESR 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.8 If a Script Warning is Issued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.8.1 Solution for Microsoft® Internet Explorer® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.8.2 Solution for Firefox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.9 Login, Logout and Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.9.1 Log In to NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.9.2 Log Out from NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.9.3 Exit WebLCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.10 WebLCT Main Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
2. LICENSE AND USER ACCOUNT 2-1
2.1 Setup Software License. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
IPASOLINK VR 4: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING GGS-000393-06E

January 2017
– ii – CONTENTS
2.1.1 Import Software License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1.2 Radio Capacity Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.3 SFP Port License Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.1.4 External Buffer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.2 User Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.1.1 Access Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.1.2 User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.2 User Access Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.2.3 Default User Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.2.4 User Account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.2.4.1 Login User List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.2.4.2 Login User Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.2.4.3 User Authentication Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.2.4.4 Privilege ID and Group Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2.2.4.5 User Account Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2.2.4.6 User Group Profile Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
3. SECURITY MANAGEMENT 3-1
3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1.1 SNMPv1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.1.1 GET/SET of MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.1.2 Send Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.1.1.3 User Application (Log) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.1.2 SNMPv2c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.1.2.1 GET/SET of MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.2.2 Send Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.2.3 User Application (Log) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.3 SNMPv3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.3.1 GET/SET of MIB.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.1.3.2 Send Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.1.3.3 Security (user authentication, session management
and encryption). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.1.4 NTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.1.4.1 As NTP Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.1.4.2 As NTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.1.5 FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.1.5.1 Data Upload and Download Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
GGS-000393-06E iPASOLINK VR 4: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING

CONTENTS – iii –
3.1.5.2 Session Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

3.1.5.3 User Authentication Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.1.6 SSHv2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.1.6.1 CLI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.1.7 SFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.1.7.1 Providing Function of Secure File Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.1.7.2 Data Upload/Download Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.1.8 HTTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.1.8.1 WebLCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.1.8.2 Session Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.1.8.3 User Authentication Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.1.9 HTTPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.1.9.1 Providing Web Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.1.9.2 Session Management among External Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.1.9.3 User Authentication Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.2 Service Status Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.3 SNMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.3.1 Set SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.4 SNMP Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.4.1 Register/Modify SNMP Community. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.4.2 Delete SNMP Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.5 SNMP Trap Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3.5.1 Set/Modify SNMP Trap Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3.5.2 Delete SNMP Trap Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3.6 NTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3.6.1 Enable NTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3.6.2 NTP Client Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3.7 NTP Server Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
3.7.1 Register/Modify NTP Server Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
3.7.2 Delete NTP Server Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
3.8 NTP Auth Key Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.8.1 Create/Modify NTP Authentication Key Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.8.2 Remove Registered NTP Authentication Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
iPASOLINK VR 4: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING GGS-000393-06E

– iv – CONTENTS
3.9 FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

3.10 SSHv2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3.11 SFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.12 HTTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.13 HTTPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
3.14 RADIUS Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
3.14.1 Set RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3.14.2 Set RADIUS Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.14.3 Remove Registered RADIUS Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
4. EQUIPMENT SETUP 4-1
4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.2 Set Equipment Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.3 Equipment Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.4 MODEM Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.5 Radio Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.6 AMR/Radio Mapping Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
5. NETWORK MANAGEMENT 5-1
5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.2 Port/VLAN Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.1 Ethernet Port Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.2 MODEM Port Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.2.3 Inband Management VLAN Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.2.3.1 For VLAN Mode 802.1Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.2.3.2 For VLAN Mode 802.1ad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.2.4 VLAN Setting Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.3 Bridge Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.4 View IPv6 Address Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.5 LLDP Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.6 Routing Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

CONTENTS –v–
5.6.1 Routing Protocol Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

5.6.2 Configure IPv4 Static Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.6.2.1 Add Routing Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.6.2.2 Modify Routing Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.6.2.3 Delete Routing Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.6.3 Configure IPv6 Static Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5.6.3.1 Add Routing Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5.6.3.2 Modify Routing Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
5.6.3.3 Delete Routing Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5.6.4 View Routing Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5.7 IP Access Control Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.7.1 Input Filter List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.7.1.1 Add Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.7.1.2 Modify Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
5.7.1.3 Delete Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
5.7.1.4 Modify Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.7.2 Forwarding Filter List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5.7.2.1 Add Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5.7.2.2 Modify Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
5.7.2.3 Delete Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
5.7.2.4 Modify Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
5.8 ARP Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
5.8.1 View ARP Cache. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
5.8.2 Static ARP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
5.8.2.1 Add Static ARP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
5.8.2.2 Modify Static ARP Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
5.8.2.3 Delete Static ARP Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
5.9 DHCP Server/Relay Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
5.9.1 Set DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
5.9.2 Set DHCP Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
5.9.3 MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
5.9.3.1 Add MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
5.9.3.2 Modify MAC Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
5.9.3.3 Delete MAC Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
5.9.3.4 Release IP Address Forcibly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
5.10 Adjust Current Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91

– vi – CONTENTS
6. PROVISIONING 6-1
6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
7. Set MODEM Function 7-1
7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.2 MODEM Port Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.3 Radio Switch Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.4 TX Power Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.4.1 ATPC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.4.1.1 MTPC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.5 ALM Mode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.6 XPIC Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.7 AMR Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
8. Set ETH Function 8-1
8.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.2 Equipment Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.2.1 Bridge Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.2.2 Max Frame Size Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.2.3 Other Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.3 ETH Port Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8.4 VLAN Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8.4.1 Add VLAN/S-VLAN ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8.4.2 Modify VLAN Service Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
8.4.3 Delete VLAN/S-VLAN ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
8.4.4 VLAN Setting (802.1Q Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8.4.5 VLAN Setting (802.1ad Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
8.5 FDB Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
8.5.1 FDB Setting (for Equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
8.5.2 FDB Setting (VLAN ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
8.5.2.1 Service Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44

CONTENTS – vii –
8.5.2.2 Port Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47

8.5.3 Static Entry Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
8.5.3.1 Add Static Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
8.5.3.2 Modify Static Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
8.5.3.3 Delete Static Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
8.6 ETH OAM Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
8.6.1 OAM MEG Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
8.6.1.1 Add MEG Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
8.6.1.2 Modify MEG Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
8.6.1.3 Delete MEG Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
8.6.2 OAM MEP Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70
8.6.2.1 Add MEP Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70
8.6.2.2 Modify MEP Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75
8.6.2.3 Delete MEP Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79
8.6.3 OAM MIP Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-82
8.6.3.1 Add MIP Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-82
8.6.3.2 Modify MIP Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-85
8.6.3.3 Delete MIP Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-88
8.6.4 LINK OAM Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-90
8.7 RSTP/MSTP Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-93
8.7.1 Select STP Mode for Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-93
8.7.2 RSTP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-96
8.7.2.1 Modify RSTP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-96
8.7.2.2 Modify Detailed RSTP Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100
8.7.3 MSTP Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-103
8.7.3.1 Modify MSTP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-103
8.7.3.2 Modify Detail MSTP Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-110
8.8 ERP Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-113
8.8.1 Configure ERP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-113
8.8.2 Modify ERP Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-122
8.8.3 Delete ERP Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-123
8.9 Link Aggregation Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-125
8.9.1 Frame Distribution Rules in VLAN Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-125
8.9.2 Frame Distribution Rules in MPLS-TP Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-125
8.9.2.1 Isolate NNI LAG and UNI (VLAN-Based) from
UNI (VLAN-Based) to Distribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-126
8.9.2.2 Isolate UNI (VLAN-Based) LAG from NNI to Distribute. . . . . . . 8-127
8.9.2.3 Isolate NNI LAG and UNI (VLAN-Based) LAG from

– viii – CONTENTS
8.9.2.4 Isolate UNI (VLAN-Based) LAG from NNI or

8.9.2.5 Isolate NNI LAG (LSR) from NNI to Distribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-130
8.9.2.6 Isolate NNI LAG (LSR) from UNI/NNI to Distribute . . . . . . . . . . 8-131
8.9.3 Add Link Aggregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-132
8.9.4 Modify LAG Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-136
8.9.5 Delete LAG Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-139
8.10 QoS/Classification Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-142
8.10.1 Classify Setting Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-144
8.10.1.1 Set Classification Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-144
8.10.1.2 Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-146
8.10.1.3 Specify Equipment Based QoS Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-149
8.10.1.4 Specify Port Based QoS Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-152
8.10.1.5 Specify VLAN ID Based QoS Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-155
8.10.2 Policer Setting Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-158
8.10.2.1 Add Policer Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-158
8.10.2.2 Modify Policer Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-162
8.10.2.3 Delete Policer Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-166
8.10.2.4 Policer Profile Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-168
8.10.3 Shaper Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-171
8.10.3.1 QoS Class and Shaper Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-171
8.10.3.2 Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-174
8.10.3.3 Edit Egress Shaper Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-178
8.10.3.4 Modify Queue Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-180
8.10.3.5 Edit Shaper Group Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-183
8.11 Filter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-187
8.11.1 Filter List Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-187
8.11.1.1 Add Filter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-187
8.11.1.2 Modify Filter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-190
8.11.1.3 Delete Filter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-193
8.11.2 Profile List Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-196
8.11.2.1 Add Profile List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-196
8.11.2.2 Modify Profile List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-199
8.11.2.3 Delete Profile List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-202
8.11.3 Port Filter Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-205
8.12 L2CP Transparent Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-207
8.13 Mirroring Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-210
8.14 Port Isolate Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-213
8.15 LLF Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-215

CONTENTS – ix –
8.15.1 Add LLF Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-215

8.15.2 Modify LLF Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-219
8.15.3 Delete LLF Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-223
8.16 Broadcast Storm Control Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-225
8.16.1 Set Broadcast Strom Control Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-225
8.16.2 Specify Broadcast Strom Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-227
9. Set MPLS-TP Function 9-1
9.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9.1.1 Settings to Proceed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.1.1 Configuring LSR (Label Switching Router) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.1.2 Configuring LER (Label Edge Router). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.2 Configuring Dual Stack Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.1.2.1 UNI (VLAN-Based) — 802.1Q. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.1.2.2 UNI (VLAN-Based) — 802.1ad <in future releases>. . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.1.2.3 UNI (Port-Based) — 802.1Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.1.2.4 UNI (Port-Based) — 802.1ad <in future releases> . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.1.2.5 NNI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.1.2.6 UNI (VLAN-Based) for MODEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.1.2.7 Restriction for Using UNI (Port-Based) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.2 Equipment Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9.3 MPLS-TP Port Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9.4 LSP Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9.4.1 LSP Setting Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9.4.1.1 Add LSP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9.4.1.2 Label Switched Path Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
9.4.1.3 Modify LSP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
9.4.1.4 Delete LSP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9.4.2 XC Setting Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
9.4.2.1 Add Cross Connect Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
9.4.2.2 Delete XC Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
9.5 PW Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9.5.1 PW Bind Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9.5.1.1 Add PW Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9.5.1.2 Modify PW Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
9.5.1.3 Delete PW Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

–x– CONTENTS
9.5.2 L2 Encapsulation Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

9.5.2.1 Add L2 Encapsulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
9.5.2.2 Delete L2 Encapsulation Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
9.6 MPLS-TP OAM Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
9.6.1 OAM MEG Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
9.6.1.1 Add OAM MEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
9.6.1.2 Modify MEG Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
9.6.1.3 Delete MEG Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
9.6.2 OAM MEP Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
9.6.2.1 Add MEP Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
9.6.2.2 Modify MEP Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
9.6.2.3 Delete MEP Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
9.6.3 OAM MIP Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
9.6.3.1 Add MIP Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
9.6.3.2 Modify MIP Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
9.6.3.3 Delete MIP Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
9.7 Linear Protection Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
9.7.1 Add APS GRP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
9.7.2 Modify APS GRP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72
9.7.3 Delete APS GRP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75
10. Set Cross Connection Using E1/STM-1 Port 10-1
10.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10.2 Cross Connect Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.2.1 Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.2.2 Add Cross Connect Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10.2.3 Modify (Edit) Cross Connect Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10.2.4 Delete Cross Connect Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.3 E1 Port Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10.4 STM-1 Port Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
11. Set PWE Function 11-1
11.1 Add New PWE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.2 Modify PWE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

CONTENTS – xi –
11.3 Delete PWE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
12. Set Equipment Clock and Synchronization 12-1
12.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

12.2 Equipment Clock Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12.2.1 Specify/Modify Equipment Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12.3 EXT Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.3.1 Specify/Modify EXT Clock Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.4 PTP Mode Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
12.4.1 Modify PTP Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
12.4.2 Add/Modify PTP Logical Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12.4.3 Delete PTP Logical Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
12.5 PTP Domain Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
12.5.1 Add/Modify PTP Master Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
12.5.2 Delete PTP Master Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
13. Assign Orderwire Channel 13-1
13.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

13.2 Assign Orderwire Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
14. Assign Alarm/AIS Settings 14-1
14.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

14.2 Correlation Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.3 Alarm Severity Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14.4 AIS Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
14.5 BER Threshold Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
14.5.1 MODEM (1+0) or MODEM SW GRP (1+1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
14.5.2 MODEM (1+0 XPIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
14.5.3 STM1-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21

– xii/END – CONTENTS
15. Assign PMON/RMON Settings 15-1
15.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

15.2 PMON Threshold Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
15.2.1 Main Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
15.2.2 MODEM/SW GRP (Slot No.) Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
15.2.3 STM1-A/APS GRP (Slot No.) Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
15.2.4 16E1-A (Slot No.) Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15
15.3 RMON Threshold Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18
15.4 Other Threshold Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21
15.4.1 RX Level TCN (Threshold Crossing Notification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21
15.4.2 SFP Optical Power TCN (Threshold Crossing Notification) . . . . . . . . 15-23
15.4.3 Temperature Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25
15.5 VLAN Counter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-27
15.5.1 VLAN Counter Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-27
15.5.1.1 Add VLAN Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-27
15.5.1.2 Modify VLAN Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-30
15.5.1.3 Delete VLAN Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-33
15.5.2 Shaper Group Counter Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-34
15.5.2.1 Add Shaper Group Counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-35
15.5.2.2 Delete Shaper Group Counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-38
15.6 LSP Counter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-40
15.6.1 Add LSP Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-40
15.6.2 Delete LSP Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-43

DOCUMENT WARRANTY -i-
DOCUMENT WARRANTY
1. The information in this document is subject to change without prior notice.
2. Screenshots of WebLCT provided in this document are examples. Screenshot

samples in this document should be the latest as of issuing time, however, their
appearances may vary according to configurations, operation modes and specified
parameters of the equipment, WebLCT application’s release version, etc.
3. This document is provided on the assumption that the targeted users have skills and
knowledge of restrictions and precautions to operate the equivalent equipment. Refer
to the equipment manual for details.

- ii/END DOCUMENT WARRANTY
This page is intentionally left blank.

OPERATE WebLCT 1-1
1. OPERATE WebLCT
1.1 Conventions Used in this Document

Following conventions are used throughout this document:
Style Description Examples:
Italic Indicates a related document title/name. Refer to iPASOLINK Operation

Manual for details
Bold  Menus and menu items The Overall window appears.

 Indications of parameters and buttons displayed
on the user interface
 Names of items in the computer display
 File names and directory names
 ➤ Indicates transition of screens and/or menu items. Select System  Login/Logout.

(arrow) Menu Path:
Provisioning ➤ PWE Setting
< item > A command variable to be entered, which requires < password >
the user’s choice or definition. Commonly used to
prompt the user to enter a password.
Initial Caps Indicates a keypad name using an uppercase for Press Enter key.
its first letter.
1.2 LCT Communication Interface
1.2.1 Communications
iPASOLINK VR 4 provides WebLCT as the Local Craft Terminal (LCT) that is a

convenient tool to install and maintain the equipment. WebLCT uses the GUI method
on WEB browser. In addition, this tool enables a remote connection.
Since using the method of WEB browser, there is no application software to install.
However, to operate iPASOLINK via WebLCT, license keys that are prepared
according to the contract and equipment version should be installed.

1-2 OPERATE WebLCT
1.2.2 Local Port Interface
The LCT Port is provided on the equipment front:
Figure 1-1 LCT Port
(to LCT port)
LAN CABLE
(10/100BASE-TX)
Connect the LAN Port on PC and LCT Port on front of the equipment (MC-AV Card
on the active side) using a LAN Cable. Following are the specifications of LAN Port/
Cable:
 10/100BASE-TX
 RJ45
1.3 iPASOLINK Equipment Configuration

Following types of configurations are available by a single iPASOLINK VR 4 IDU:
 5-Way Nodal [Non-Protected (1+0)]
 Protected (1+1) with hot standby, space diversity, twin path with hitless switch.
NOTE: For the system where the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, the
1+1 Hot-Standby Configuration is currently not available (to be
supported in future releases).
 Two pairs of XPIC
 Ethernet-ring
GGS-000393-06E IPASOLINK VR 4: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING

OPERATE WebLCT 1-3
1.4 Hardware Requirements
Component Windows 7® (32 bits, 64 bits) Windows 8.1® (32 bits, 64 bits)
CPU Intel Core i5 2 cores 2.0 GHz or greater Intel Core i52 cores 2.0 GHz or greater
RAM 2 GB or greater 2 GB or greater
HDD 40 GB or greater 40 GB or greater
Display Color LCD (1024 × 768) Color LCD (1024 × 768)
LAN Port 10/100BASE-T(X) 10/100BASE-T(X)
USB Port ——— ———
1.5 Software Requirements
Item Requirement
Supported Operating System Windows 7® (32 bits, 64 bits) [English Version]
Windows 8.1® (32 bits, 64 bits) [English Version]
Browsing Software Microsoft® Internet Explorer 11
Mozilla Firefox™ ESR 38
NOTE: It is not recommended to use the Zoom function of these browsers while
operating the WebLCT. Using this function may affect the appearance of
WebLCT windows.
1.6 Operating System Environment

Check if your PC satisfies the conditions below:
 Internet Explorer is installed
 TCP/IP Protocol is properly set.

1-4 OPERATE WebLCT
1.7 Recommended Settings for Browsing Software

Following are the recommended settings for the browsing software (browsers)
available to operate LCT. (Examples use the Windows® 7.)
1.7.1 Microsoft® Internet Explorer 11
Procedure 1-1 Set Tabbed Browsing Option
Tabbed Browsing option is recommended.
1. Start up the Internet Explorer 8.
2. Click Tools on the menu bar or the command bar, and select Internet
Options. Following example is selecting Tools on the menu bar.
Figure 1-2 Internet Explorer — Select Internet Options
The Internet Options window appears.

OPERATE WebLCT 1-5
3. On the General tabbed page, click Settings under Tabs option.
Figure 1-3 Internet Options — General Tab
4. The Tabbed Browsing Settings option window appears. Select Always open
pop-ups in a new tab, then click the OK button.
Figure 1-4 Tabbed Browsing Settings Option Window
Proceed to Procedure 1-2.

1-6 OPERATE WebLCT
Procedure 1-2 Set Security Options
1. Click Security tab to show the security options, and click Custom level
button.
Figure 1-5 Internet Options — Security
Custom level button
2. Security Settings — Internet Zone option window appears. Select Enable for
Downloads — Automatic prompting for file downloads option.
Figure 1-6 Internet Options — Security Settings — Internet Zone
3. Click the OK button.

OPERATE WebLCT 1-7
1.7.2 Mozilla Firefox™ ESR 38
Procedure 1-3 Customize Firefox
1. Start up the Firefox.
2. Click Tools on the menu bar, and select Options.
Figure 1-7 Firefox — Tools Menu
3. The Options window appears. Select Always ask me where to save files,
then click the OK button.
Figure 1-8 Options — General

1-8 OPERATE WebLCT
1.8 If a Script Warning is Issued

According to the complexity or massiveness of the registered configuration,
iPASOLINK may take some time to run the scripts, by which the browser issues a
script warning to ask if you still want to continue or stop running the script.
DO NOT STOP RUNNING THE SCRIPT

or iPASOLINK cannot complete the whole process.
However, if this message appears repeatedly, annoying you, proceed with the
following to stop displaying, instead of stop running the script:
1.8.1 Solution for Microsoft® Internet Explorer®

Following is the message dialog by the Internet Explore® if any script takes too long
to respond, or is getting out of control:
Figure 1-9 Run Slowly Message
If the message above appears, proceed with the following:
1. Close all the Internet Explorer® windows.
2. Launch the Internet Explorer® newly, and go to the web site by following
URL: http://support.microsoft.com/kb/175500
Figure 1-10 Error Message
(Example used here is English Version. Language used differs according to where you are.)

OPERATE WebLCT 1-9
3. Scroll down the page to show the Fix it tool button, then click it.
Figure 1-11 Fix It Window

Fix it tool button
4. Security Warning dialog box appears. Click the Run button in the dialog box,
and follow the steps in the Fix it wizard:
Figure 1-12 Security Warning Dialog Box

1-10 OPERATE WebLCT
1.8.2 Solution for Firefox
Following is the message dialog by the Firefox™ if any script takes too long to
respond, or a is getting out of control:
Figure 1-13 Unresponsive Script Warning Message
If the message above appears while the iPASOLINK process is in progress, proceed
with the following:
1. Click to leave a tick in the Don’t ask me again check box.
Figure 1-14 Request Action
Don’t ask me again check box
Continue button
2. Then click the Continue button.
This warning message will not appear again.

OPERATE WebLCT 1-11
1.9 Login, Logout and Exit
1.9.1 Log In to NE
Users are registered by means of login names and their passwords. To protect the
network and network management system from unauthorized access or unauthorized
modifications, three levels with different privileges (refer to the table shown in
Section <Arial_10XF>2.2.2 User Access Levels) define users. The available
functions to operate depend on the user’s privilege level. Therefore, some of the
functions may or may not be carried out.
The highest or administrator level (Admin) has the full access to the network and
network management system.
Procedure 1-4
1. Power on the computer.
2. Log in to the Windows as the Administrator.
3. Click start, and select Programs  Internet Explore. The Internet Explorer
window appears.
4. In Address field, enter an IP address of the NE adding /weblct/ as shown

below:
 IPv4: http://172.17.254.253/weblct/
 IPv6: http://[fe80::1:da50]/weblct/
Figure 1-15 Launch WebLCT

1-12 OPERATE WebLCT
5. The Login window for WebLCT appears. Enter a user name and his/her
password into User Name and Password fields:
Figure 1-16 WebLCT Login Window
Following are the default user name and its password for iPASOLINK VR 4:
 User Name: Admin
 Password: 12345678
6. Click the OK button blow the Login fields. System Status indicator appears.
7. Click the OK button, or wait till the box automatically disappears. (The System
Status indicator disappears in a while without clicking the OK button if you
wait.)
Figure 1-17 System Status Indicator
The main window for WebLCT appears:

OPERATE WebLCT 1-13
Figure 1-18 WebLCT Main Window
NOTE: When the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, the 1+1 Hot Standby
Configuration is currently not available.

1-14 OPERATE WebLCT
1.9.2 Log Out from NE

Procedure 1-5
1. Click Logout button in the upper right of WebLCT main window.
Figure 1-19 Logout Button on WebLCT Main Window

Logout button
2. The Confirmation dialog box appears. Click the OK button to log out.
Figure 1-20 Confirmation Dialog Box
3. The browser returns to WebLCT Login window.
This step ends the procedure.
1.9.3 Exit WebLCT
Following are the methods to exit WebLCT:

 Select File (F)  Close (X) from Internet Explorer menu bar.
 Click button in the upper right of Internet Explorer.

OPERATE WebLCT 1-15
1.10 WebLCT Main Window

Following describes the contents and structure of WebLCT main window:
Figure 1-21 WebLCT Main Window Contents

(1) NE Name
(2) Logged-In User Name (8) Opposite Site Links
(3) Refresh button
(4) Auto Mode check box (9) Maintenance button
(5) Hide Equipment View check box
(6) Hide NR (10) Logout button
(7) Equipment Status View
(11) Menu Tree (12) Status List
(1) NE Name
This field indicates a registered equipment name.
(2) Logged-In User Name [Login User]

This field indicates a user name that is currently logged in.
(3) Refresh button
Click Refresh button to manually update the current status displayed in the WebLCT
main window.

1-16 OPERATE WebLCT
(4) Auto Mode check box
Check (click to leave a tick in) Auto Mode check box to enable refreshing the
window automatically.
(5) Hide Equipment View check box
Check (click to leave a tick in) Hide Equipment View check box to hide the
illustrated equipment status view.
(6) Hide NR
Check (click to leave a tick in) Hide NR check box to hide the lines of Normal
Responses from the equipment status view.
(7) Equipment Status View
This field shows the current equipment status.
(8) Opposite Site Links

This drop-down list shows a list of NEs on the opposed sites. A user can select an NE
from the list to log in to.
(9) Maintenance button
Click Maintenance tool button before starting any maintenance operations.
(10) Logout button
Click Logout button to log out from NE.
(11) Menu Tree
This part shows the menus for the equipment configuration and provisioning by a tree
view. Available operations via WebLCT are:
(a) Current Status

Current Status lists current status and event histories of the equipment by each
part of an NE (Active Alarm, Event Log, ODU, IDU, AUX).
(b) Equipment Setup

This item is to register or remove ODU and IDU Cards and other relevant
configurations.
(c) Network Management Setting

This item is to configure and set up the network environment. This item also
provides the User Account management as well.

OPERATE WebLCT 1-17
(d) Provisioning
This item is to configure the detailed settings of IDU and ODU.
(e) Maintenance Control

Maintenance Control executes a protection switch, Loopback, Hardware Reset,
Firmware Reset, etc.
(f) Maintenance Test

Maintenance Test measures the link quality of Ethernet traffic.
(g) PMON/RMON Report

This item is to retrieve the information of Performance Monitor (PMON) and
Remote Network Monitor (RMON). A user can also exports the data to external
storage (local PC, USB Memory, etc.) For more details, refer to the Maintenance
manual.
(h) Metering
Metering measures the real time TX power, RX level, ODU power supply and
BER.
(i) Equipment Utility

Select this menu to upload and download the equipment configuration data,
software, firmware and FPGA data.
(j) Inventory
Inventory retrieves the information regarding the equipment and software
license.
(k) S/W License Setup

This menu is used to manage the license keys.
(12) Status List
Click a tab to select a type of status to show its logs.

1-18/END OPERATE WebLCT

LICENSE AND USER ACCOUNT 2-1
2. LICENSE AND USER ACCOUNT
NOTE: Procedures here use the Microsoft® Internet Explorer for the
browsing software as an example.
2.1 Setup Software License

Software License Key must be installed to operate iPASOLINK equipment via
WebLCT. Some operations, such as registering user accounts, do not require the
license. Thus, the Software License Key should be installed sometime between
logging in to WebLCT and registering/setting the equipment attributes.
2.1.1 Import Software License Key
Procedure 2-1
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the S/W License Setup to select
Import License key. The Import License key window appears.
3. Click the Setup tool button.
Figure 2-1 S/W License Setup — Import License key Window
Setup tool button

2-2 LICENSE AND USER ACCOUNT
4. File selection window for Import License key appears. Click the button,
and select a target file:
Figure 2-2 Import License key Option Window
Figure 2-3 Choose File to Upload Option Window
5. Import License key option window displays the selected file name. Confirm
the file name, then click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 2-4 Import License key Option Window (selected)

6. When the importing process ends, the Import License key window updates
the information.
Figure 2-5 Import License key Dialog Box

2.1.2 Radio Capacity Setting
Procedure 2-2
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the S/W License Setup to select Radio
Capacity Setting. The Radio Capacity Setting window appears.
Figure 2-6 Radio Capacity Setting Window
Setup tool button
Radio Capacity Setting option window appears.

4. Select the MODEM Position from the New State drop-down list to specify the
state, then click the OK button.
Figure 2-7 Radio Capacity Setting Box
5. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.
Figure 2-8 Information Dialog Box
6. The Radio Capacity Setting window updates the information. Confirm the
displayed parameters.
Figure 2-9 Radio Capacity Setting Window

2.1.3 SFP Port License Setting
Procedure 2-3
1. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the S/W License Setup to select SFP
Port License Setting. The SFP Port License Setting window appears.
Figure 2-10 SFP Port License Setting Window
Setup tool button
SFP Port License Setting option window appears.

3. Select the desired Slot # from the New State drop-down list, then click the OK
button.
Figure 2-11 SFP Port License Setting Box
Figure 2-12 Information Box
5. The SFP Port License Setting window updates the information. Confirm the
parameters displayed.
Figure 2-13 SFP Port License Setting Window

2.1.4 External Buffer Setting
NOTE: For the system where the Equipment Mode is et to MPLS-TP, this function is
currently not available.
Procedure 2-4
1. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the S/W License Setup to select
External Buffer Setting. The External Buffer Setting window appears.

Figure 2-14 External Buffer Setting Window
Setup tool button
3. External Buffer Setting option window appears. Select the Enable from the
External Buffer drop-down list, then click the OK button.
NOTE: To enable the External Buffer, it is recommended to set the Queue

Length value to 128 kilobytes or greater. See Table 8-41 Number of
Queue Setting Options provided in 8.10 QoS/Classification
Setting (8.10.3.2 Edit Profile) in this manual for setting Queue
Length value.
Figure 2-15 External Buffer Setting Option Window
Warning dialog box appears.

4. Check if the system is okay to be reset, then click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 2-16 Warning Dialog Box
6. Another Information dialog box appears to notice that the session has been
terminated. Click the OK button to proceed.
7. To verify the condition, launch the WebLCT when the system is ready, and
open the External Buffer Setting window.
Figure 2-19 External Buffer Setting Window

2.2 User Management

The user management is a function to manage an authorized user to access to a
network system, and to prevent an unauthorized user from accessing to the network
system.
2.2.1 Overview
2.2.1.1 Access Level
iPASOLINK provides three user access levels with different privilege as shown in the
table below. For details of each access level and its available operations, refer to
<Arial_10XF>Table 2-3 User Access Privilege Levels.
Table 2-1 Access Levels
Component Available Task File Operation SNMP Operation

Operator View the equipment configuration and status. Upload only Obtain
Config In addition to tasks available by Operator level, man- w Upload w Obtain
agement of radio base band and switching function.
w Download w Set
Admin In addition to tasks available by Config level, man- w Upload w Obtain
agement of user accounts and time adjustments.
w Download w Set
Following describes the terms, such as upload and download mentioned in the table
above:
 Upload is to copy a file from NE to an external storage, such as WebLCT PC.
 Download is to copy a file from an external storage to the internal storage of
equipment.
2.2.1.2 User Group

User Group configuration allows a user to manage the protocol type and access level
for each group. A user of the specified User Group in iPASOLINK will be assigned
with the pre-defined protocol and access level of the group. In addition to the three
default user groups, up to six user groups can be added. The default user groups are
shown below:
NOTE: Options specified to the default user groups cannot be modified.
Table 2-2 User Group Profile
Group Name Classification FTP SSHv2 SFTP HTTP HTTPS SNMP Access Level
OPERATOR Unchangeable ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Operator
CONFIG Unchangeable ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Config
ADMIN Unchangeable ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Admin

2.2.2 User Access Levels

Following shows the access level for each task. Remote means that a user makes an
access to the equipment remotely.
 Meanings:
R/W: A user can both browse and modify settings.
R: A user can browse the settings.
O: The task is operational by a remote access but is restricted according to the access
level assigned to the user.
Table 2-3 User Access Privilege Levels (1 of 4)
WebLCT Menu Admin Config Operator Remote

Current Status R R R R
Equipment Setup
Equipment Mode Setting
Equipment Configuration R/W R R O
MODEM Migration R/W — — O
Radio Configuration R/W R R O
AMR/Radio Mapping Configuration R/W R R O
Network Management Setting

Port/VLAN Setting R/W R R O
Bridge Setting R/W R R O
IPv6 Address Table R/W R R O
LLDP Setting R/W R R O
Routing Setting R/W R R O
IP Access Control Setting R/W R R O
ARP Setting R/W R R O
DHCP Server / Relay Setting R/W R/W R O
Date/Time Setting R/W R R O
User Account/Security Login User List R — — O
Setting
User Authentication
R/W R R O
Configuration
User Account Management R/W — — O
User Group Profile
R/W — — O
Configuration
Security Management Service Status Setting R/W — — O
RADIUS Setting R/W R R O


Provisioning
MODEM Function Setting MODEM Port Setting R/W R/W R O
Radio Switch Setting R/W R/W R O
TX Power Setting R/W R/W R O
ALM Mode Setting R/W R/W R O
XPIC Setting R/W R/W R O
AMR Setting R/W R/W R O
ETH Function Setting Equipment Setting R/W R/W R O
ETH Port Setting R/W R/W R O
VLAN Setting R/W R/W R O
FDB Setting R/W R/W R O
ETH OAM Setting R/W R/W R O
RSTP/MSTP Setting R/W R/W R O
ERP Setting R/W R/W R O
Link Aggregation Setting R/W R/W R O
QoS/Classification Setting R/W R/W R O
Filter Setting R/W R/W R O
L2CP Transparent Setting R/W R/W R O
Mirroring Setting R/W R/W R O
Port Isolate Setting R/W R/W R O
LLF Setting R/W R/W R O
Broadcast Storm Control
R/W R/W R O
Setting
MPLS-TP Function Setting Equipment Setting R/W R/W R O
MPLS-TP Port Setting R/W R/W R O
LSP Setting R/W R/W R O
PW Setting R/W R/W R O
MPLS-TP OAM Setting R/W R/W R O
Linear Protection Setting R/W R/W R O
E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Cross Connect Setting R/W R/W R O
Setting
E1 Port Setting R/W R/W R O
STM-1 Port Setting R/W R/W R O
PWE Setting R/W R/W R O
Equipment Clock/ Equipment Clock Setting R/W R/W R O
Synchronization Setting
EXT Clock Setting R/W R/W R O
PTP Mode Setting R/W R/W R O
PTP Domain Setting R/W R/W R O


SC/OW Setting OW Setting R/W R/W R O
Alarm/AIS Setting Correlation Setting R/W R/W R O
Alarm Severity Setting R/W R/W R O
AIS Setting R/W R/W R O
BER Threshold Setting R/W — R —
PMON/RMON Setting PMON Threshold Setting R/W R/W R O
RMON Threshold Setting R/W R/W R O
Other Threshold Setting R/W R/W R O
VLAN Counter Setting R/W R/W R O
LSP Counter Setting R/W R/W R O
Maintenance Control
Loopback Control MODEM Loopback Control R/W R/W R O
TDM Loopback Control
R/W R/W R O
(E1 Loopback 1)
R/W R/W R O
(E1 Loopback 2)
R/W R/W R O
(STM-1 Loopback 1)
R/W R/W R O
(STM-1 Loopback 2)
L2 Loopback Control R/W R/W R O
Link OAM Loop Back R/W R/W R O
Protection Control MODEM TX/RX Switch
R/W R/W R O
Control
RSTP/MSTP Control R/W R R O
ERP Control R/W R/W R O
LAG Revert Control R/W R/W R O
SNCP Switch Control R/W R/W R O
APS Switch Group Control R/W R/W R O
Timing Source Switch
R/W R/W R O
Control
Linear Protection Control R/W R/W R O
MODEM Maintenance Control R/W R/W R O*1
Laser Shutdown Control R/W R/W R O
OW Buzzer Control R/W R/W R O
H/W, F/W Reset Control H/W Reset Control R/W — — O
F/W Reset Control R/W — — O
Offline Maintenance Control R/W R — —


PTP Domain Control — — — —
Maintenance Test
ETH OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control R/W R R O
MPLS-TP OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control R/W R R O
PMON/RMON Report
MODEM PMON Report R R R O
E1 PMON Report R R R O
STM-1 PMON Report R R R O
ETH RMON Report R R R O
VLAN Counter Report R R R O
LSP Counter Report R R R O
Metering
Current Metering R/W R/W R O
Equipment Utility
Export (NE -> Storage) Utility R/W R/W — O
Update (Storage -> NE) Utility R/W R/W — O
Program ROM Switching R/W — — O
USB Memory Utility R R R O
Log Clear Function — — — —
Shipment R/W — — —
Inventory
Equipment Inventory Information R/W R R R
S/W License Information R R R R
User Description R/W R/W R R
S/W License Setup

Import License Key R/W — — O
Radio Capacity Setting R/W R R O
SFP Port License Setting R/W R R O
External Buffer Setting R/W R/W R O
*1: CW Control is not editable.

2.2.3 Default User Account
iPASOLINK provides three default user accounts with pre-defined access levels and
privileges. In addition to these default user accounts, up to 100 user accounts can be
added.
Following describes the pre-defined default user accounts:
Table 2-4 Default User Accounts
User Name Default Password Description User Group
User 87654321 A User is able to view the information of system OPERATOR

configuration and equipment status, but is not
allowed to make any changes to the configuration.
Config 87654321 In addition to the tasks available for a User, Config CONFIG
user is able to operate the radio management, base
band management, switching management for C-
Plane control
Admin 12345678 In addition to the tasks available for a Config user, ADMIN
Admin user is able to operate database
management, file management, user management
and time adjustment for M-Plane control.

2.2.4 User Account
Following are the functions to manage user accounts supported by iPASOLINK:
 Login User List

Login User List displays the information of registered user accounts. From this list,
user profiles, such as passwords and User Group Profiles can be modified. This
window also provides the function (Login User Control) to limit the maximum
number of users that can access to the equipment.
 User Authentication Configuration

User Authentication Configuration provides the authentication methods to select.
 User Account Management

User Account Management is used to register new user accounts, and to modify/
delete the registered user accounts.
 User Group Profile Configuration

User Group Profile Configuration is used to register new User Groups, and to
modify/delete the registered User Groups.

2.2.4.1 Login User List
This function allows users to view and confirm the registered user accounts.
Procedure 2-5
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management Setting, and its
submenu User Account / Security Setting to select Login User List. The
Login User List appears.
Figure 2-20 Login User List

 To specify the maximum number of accessing users, go to 2.2.4.2 Login User
Control.

2.2.4.2 Login User Control
Procedure 2-6
Menu Path:
Network Management Setting ➤ User Account / Security Setting
➤ Login User List
1. Click the Login User Control link.
Figure 2-21 Select Login User Control in Login User List Window
click
2. Login User Control option window appears. Specify the maximum number
of users to allow logging in, then click the OK button.
Figure 2-22 Login User Control Option Window
Table 2-5 Login User Control Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Total Number of Admin/ 1 to 6 Limits the maximum number of Admin and Cnfig
Config Level Accounts level users to log in.

3. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.
4. Login User List window updates the information.
Figure 2-24 Login User List Window

2.2.4.3 User Authentication Configuration
An authentication method for iPASOLINK can be specified using the User

Authentication Configuration.
NOTE: This operation is available only by users whose access level is Admin.
 Authentication Setting
Determines and sets the authentication method to log in to iPASOLINK.
 Privilege ID / Group Name

Assigns authority levels to the registered Group Names.
Procedure 2-7 Authentication Setting
submenu User Account / Security Setting to select User Authentication
Configuration. The User Authentication Configuration window appears.
3. Click the Authentication Setting link.
Figure 2-25 User Authentication Configuration Window
click the link

4. Authentication Setting option window appears. Select values, then click the
OK button.
Figure 2-26 Authentication Setting Option Window
Table 2-6 Authentication Setting Parameters
Authentication NE Only Login authentications are proceeded only by the internal

Method authentication function, using the accounts and their passwords
registered to the equipment. Selecting this option enables the
Login Protection option.
NE + RADIUS If it fails at the internal authentication function, the external

authentication by RADIUS Server is proceeded. To use this
function, settings for RADIUS are required. Selecting this
option enables the Authentication Sequence option.
Authentication NE -> RADIUS Server Login authentications are proceeded by the order from IDU to
Sequence RADIUS Server. This option is available when the
Authentication Method is set to IDU + RADIUS.
RADIUS Server -> NE Login authentications are proceeded by the order from RADIUS
Server to IDU. This option is available when the Authentication
Method is set to IDU + RADIUS.
Login Protection Enable Enables the account locking (Login Protection) that is the
internal authentication function using the registered account
and their passwords for WebLCT and CLI.
Disable Disables the Login Protection where no account locking

function is proceeded.

6. The User Authentication Configuration window updates the information.

Verify the displayed information.

 To assign privilege IDs and Group Names, go to 2.2.4.4 Privilege ID and
Group Name.

2.2.4.4 Privilege ID and Group Name

Following procedure applies a Group Name to the selected Privilege ID.
Procedure 2-8
Menu Path:
Network Management Setting ➤ User Account / Security Setting
➤ User Authentication Configuration
1. Click a Privilege ID No. link of the target group.
Privilege ID numbers
2. Privilege ID option window for the selected ID number appears. Select the
method to assign, then click the OK button.
Figure 2-30 Privilege ID Option Window

Table 2-7 Setting for Privilege ID
Group Name Operator Each group is mapped to a privilege level defined

by the vendor specific message.
Config
ADMIN
Default Permission
4. The User Authentication Configuration window updates the information.


2.2.4.5 User Account Management
This function allows users to add registrations of new user accounts, and to modify/
delete the registered user accounts.
NOTE: The operations regarding this function are available by the Admin-level user(s)
only.
 Add User Account

This function is used to register a new user account.
NOTE: In addition to the three default accounts, up to 100 user accounts can be added.
 Modify User Account

This function is used to modify the information of registered user accounts including
their password and User Group.
 Delete User Account

This function is used to remove registered user accounts.

Procedure 2-9 Add User Account
NOTE: Security Level (Hash Algorithm / Priv (Privacy) Algorithm) is required to be set
to add new user accounts. Once a registration of a user is completed, the
security level of this user cannot be modified.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management Setting, then its
submenu User Account / Security Setting to select User Account
Management. The User Account Management window appears.
3. Click Add User tool button.
Figure 2-33 User Account Management Window
Add User button
The User Setting option window appears.

4. Enter the appropriate value to each parameter for the user to be added.
Figure 2-34 User Setting Option Window
i) Enter a User Name within one to 31 characters long.
ii) Click Set Password tool button on the tool bar to open the Set Password option
window, enter the password within eight to 31 characters long, then click the
OK button.
Figure 2-35 Set Password Option Window
iii) Select Group Name. See <Arial_10XF>Table 2-2 User Group Profile for User
Groups.
iv) Select Security Level:

 Selecting NoAuthNoPriv has no additional settings. Go to Step 5.
 Selecting AuthNoPriv enables Auth Algorithm option. Click a radio button to
select the algorithm type, and enter Auth Key. See <Arial_10XF>(a) Setting
Authentication Algorithm below.
 Selecting AuthPriv enables both Auth Algorithm and Priv Algorithm options.
Click radio buttons to select algorithm types, and enter Auth Key and Priv Key.
See <Arial_10XF>(a) Setting Authentication Algorithm and <Arial_10XF>(b)
Setting Privacy Algorithm below.

(a) Setting Authentication Algorithm
➀ Select AuthNoPriv or AuthPriv to enable the Auth Algorithm option.
➁ Select MD5 or SHA by clicking its radio button.
➂ Click Set Auth Key button on the tool bar to open the option window.
➃ Enter the Auth Key within eight to 16 digits, the click the OK button.
Figure 2-36 Set Auth Key
Verify the selection and entry.
 To set Priv Algorithm, go to <Arial_10XF>(b) Setting Privacy Algorithm below.
 To complete the procedure, go to Step 5.

(b) Setting Privacy Algorithm
➀ Select AuthPriv to enable the Priv Algorithm option.
➁ Select DES or AES by clicking its radio button.
➂ Click Set Priv Key button on the tool bar to open the option window.
➃ Enter the Priv Key within eight to 16 digits, the click the OK button.
Figure 2-37 Set Privacy Algorithm
Verify the selection and entry, then go to Step 5.
5. Click the OK button of the User Setting option window. The Information
dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
The User Account Management window updates the information.

7. Confirm the registered user account information.

Table 2-8 User Setting Parameters

User Name (text field) Valid value: One to 31 characters long.
Password (read only) Valid value: Eight to 31 characters long. To enter the password, click Set
Password button on the tool bar.
Group Name ADMIN Assign a Group Name for the user to be added. Refer to
<Arial_9XR>Table 2-2 User Group Profile for User Group.
CONFIG
OPERATOR
GROUP
Security Level NoAuthNoPriv Allows a user to log in without authentication and encryption.
AuthNoPriv A user needs authentication but no encryption to log in. Selecting this
option enables Auth Algorithm radio button below.
AuthPriv A user needs authentication and data are encrypted by DES or AES.
Selecting this option enables Priv Algorithm radio button below.
Auth Algorithm MD5 MD5 (Message-Digest algorithm 5) is one of the Hash Algorithm for
authentication and digital signature. In order to detect the falsification of
original data while transmitting, the original data will be converting the
Hash by comparing them at both ends.
SHA SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) is one of the Hash Algorithm for authentica-
tion and digital signature. In order to detect the falsification of original data
while transmitting, less than 2 64 bits of the original data will be converting
the Hash of 160 bits by comparing it at both ends.
Auth Key (read only) Valid value: Eight to 16 digits of MD5 or SHA1 public key. To enter the
Authentication Key, click Set Auth Key button on the tool bar.
Priv Algorithm DES DES (Data Encryption Standard) uses a 56-bit encryption key. The block
size is 64 bits.
AES AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is SPN-Structured block encryption.
The block size is 128 bits, and the length of the key is 128/192/256 bits.
Priv Key (read only) Valid value: Eight to 16 digits. To enter the Privacy Key, click Set Priv Key
button on the tool bar.

Procedure 2-10 Modify User Account
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Nerwork MaUser Account / Security
Setting to select User Account Management. The User Account
Management window appears.
3. Click on a User Name of the target user account.
4. The User Setting option window appears. Modify the registered value(s):
 To modify the password, click Set Password button on the tool bar to open the Set
Password option window, enter the password within eight to 31 characters long,
and click the OK button of the Set Password option window.

 To modify the Group Name, select an appropriate Group Name from the Group
Name drop-down list. See Table 2-2 User Group Profile for User Groups.
Figure 2-42 Set Password Option Window
5. When completed, click OK button of the User Setting option window.
6. The Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.
User Account Management window updates the information.

7. Confirm the modified user account information.

Procedure 2-11 Delete User Account
submenu User Account / Security Setting to select User Account
Management. The User Account Management window appears.
3. Click Delete User tool button on the tool bar
Delete User button
4. The User Setting option window appears. From User Name drop-down list,
select a user account to be removed, and click the OK button.
Figure 2-47 User Setting (Delete) Option Window

5. Confirmation dialog box appears. Confirm the user name to be removed, and
click the OK button.
7. The User Account Management window updates the information. Confirm

that the selected user account has been removed.

2.2.4.6 User Group Profile Configuration
This operation registers/modifies User Group Profiles. The privilege of iPASOLINK

user is the subject to change according to the user access level and protocols that are
assigned by the User Group Profile. Only the Admin level user(s) is/are available to
configure the settings.
 Add User Group Profile

This operation registers a new User Group Profile adding to the default User Group
Profiles.
NOTE: In addition to the three default User Group Profiles, up to six User Group
Profiles can be registered.
 Modify User Group Profile

This operation modifies the Access Level and Protocol of the registered User Group
Profile.
 Delete User Group Profile

This operation deletes a registered User Group Profile.

Procedure 2-12 Add User Group
submenu User Account / Security Setting to select User Group Profile
Configuration.
3. The User Group Profile Configuration window appears. Click Add Group tool
button on the tool bar.
Figure 2-51 User Group Profile Configuration Window
Add Group button
The Group Setting option window appears.

4. Specify the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 2-52 Group Setting Option Window
OK button
Table 2-9 User Group Setting Parameters
Group Name (text field) Valid value: One to 32 characters long.
FTP Allow Select to use FTP protocol for file transfer.
Deny Not to use FTP for file transfer.
SSHv2 Allow Select to use SSHv2 protocol for CLI accessing to the equipment.
Deny Not to use SSHv2 protocol for CLI accessing to the equipment.
SFTP Allow Select to use SFTP protocol for file transfer.
Deny Not to use SFTP for file transfer.
HTTP Allow Select to use HTTP protocol for WebLCT accessing to the equipment.
Deny Not to use HTTP for WebLCT accessing to the equipment.
HTTPS Allow Select to use HTTPS protocol for WebLCT accessing to the equipment.
Deny Not to use HTTPS for WebLCT accessing to the equipment.
SNMP Allow Select to use SNMP protocol for accessing NEs.
Deny Not to use SNMP protocol for accessing NEs.
Access Level Admin Specifies the user access level. See <Arial_9XR>Table 2-3 User Access
Privilege Levels for each level’s description.
Config
Operator

5. When completed, click the OK button.
7. The User Group Profile Configuration window updates the information.

Confirm that the information of newly added User Group Profile is displayed.
This step ends the procedure

Procedure 2-13 Modify User Group
Configuration. The User Group Profile Configuration window appears.
3. Click on a target Group Name.
click
The Group Setting option window appears.

4. Modify parameters:
Figure 2-56 Group Setting Option Window
OK button
 Click either Allow or Deny radio button to select a protocol.

 Select the appropriate Access Level from its drop-down list.
5. Click the OK button when completed. The Information dialog box appears.
The User Group Profile Configuration window updates the information.

7. Confirm the displayed Group Profile information.

Procedure 2-14 Delete User Group
NOTE: A User Group can be removed only when it has no assigned user account.
Configuration. The User Group Profile Configuration window appears.
3. Click Delete Group tool button on the tool bar.
Delete Group button
4. The Group Setting option window appears. Select a target Group Name to be
removed from the drop-down list, and click the OK button.
Figure 2-60 Group Setting (Delete) Option Window

2-44/END LICENSE AND USER ACCOUNT
5. Confirmation dialog box appears. Confirm the selected Group Name, and click
the OK button to proceed.
7. The User Group Profile Configuration window updates the information.

Confirm that the target group name has been removed.

SECURITY MANAGEMENT 3-1
3. SECURITY MANAGEMENT
3.1 Overview
iPASOLINK supports the following protocols and security management functions:
3.1.1 SNMPv1
SNMPv1 (Simple Network Management Protocol Version 1) is a communication

protocol to monitor/control NEs on an IP network, which is specified by the
following RFCs:
Table 3-1 RFC Standards
RFC No. Title
RFC 1155 Structure and Identification of Management Information on TCP/IP-based

Internets (SMIv1)
RFC 1157 A Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 1213 Management Information Base on Network Management of TCP/IP-based

internets: MIB-II
iPASOLINK enables SNMPv1 to support the following functions:
3.1.1.1 GET/SET of MIB

Following are responses to the request of PDU (Protocol Data Unit) supported by
SNMPv1. Up to ten SNMP managers including the setting of IP address, community
name, security settings, etc., can be registered via the WebLCT. By default,
iPASOLINK uses the port 161 to receive the SNMP request UDP. To use the other
than the default port, change the settings via the WebLCT.0
Table 3-2 PDU Supported by SNMPv1
Item Description
GetRequest Requests the specified instance value.
GetNextRequest Requests the subsequent instance value of specified instance value in the list.
GetResponse Responds to the corresponding GetRequest and Set Request.
SetRequest Sets the specified instance value.
Trap Informs the change of state and troubles (SNMPv1-Trap).

3-2 SECURITY MANAGEMENT
3.1.1.2 Send Trap

iPASOLINK can send SNMPv1 trap initiatively to UDP Port 162. Except for sending
the trap to the connected NMS, user can specify an IP address of one additional
destination. A user can also specify the community name and UDP Port.
3.1.1.3 User Application (Log)

iPASOLINK records the names of logged-in users in the log file.
3.1.2 SNMPv2c
SNMPv2c (Simple Network Management Protocol Version 2c) is a communication

protocol to monitor/control NEs on an IP network, and is a revised version of
SNMPv1. The differences between v1 and v2c are that the GetBulk, the inform
request, unified packet format of each PDU are added, conforming to SMIv2 and
following RFCs:
RFC No. Title
SNMPv2c
RFC 1901 Introduction to Community-based SNMPv2
RFC 3416 Version 2 of the Protocol Operations for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3417 Transport Mappings for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3428 Management Information Base (MIB) for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3584 Coexistence between Version 1, Version 2, and Version 3 of the Internet-
standard Network Management Framework
SMIv2
RFC 2578 Structure of Management Information Version 2 (SMIv2)
RFC 2579 Textual Conventions for SMIv2
RFC 2580 Conformance Statements for SMIv2
iPASOLINK enables SNMPv2c to support the following functions:

3.1.2.1 GET/SET of MIB

iPASOLINK responds to the request of the network management system.
Up to ten SNMP managers including the setting of IP address, community name,

security settings, etc., can be registered via WebLCT.
By default, iPASOLINK uses the port 161 to receive the SNMP request UDP. To use
other than the default port, change the settings via WebLCT.
Table 3-4 PDU Supported by SNMPv2c
Item Description
GetNextRequest Requests the subsequent instance value of specified instance value in the
list.
Response Responds to the corresponding various kinds of Request.
SNMPv2-Trap Informs the change of state and troubles. The format is different from
SNMP v1 trap.
GetBulkRequest Requests a number of instance value.
InformRequest Informs an event.
3.1.2.2 Send Trap

iPASOLINK can send SNMPv2 trap and InformRequest initiatively to UDP port 162.
Except for sending the trap to the connected NMS, user can specify an IP address of
one additional destination. User can also specify the community name and UDP Port.
3.1.2.3 User Application (Log)

iPASOLINK records the logged-in user name in the log file.
3.1.3 SNMPv3
SNMPv3 (Simple Network Management Protocol Version 3) is a communication

protocol to monitor/control NEs on an IP network, and is the newest version of
SNMP. The differences between SNMPv1/v2c and v3 are that the user authentication,
ciphered communication, and the change-packet format are enhanced, conforming to
the following RFCs for SMIv2 that define SNMPv3, SNMPv2c:

RFC No. Title
SNMPv3
RFC 3411 An Architecture for Describing Simple Network Management Protocol

(SNMP) Management Frameworks
RFC 3412 Message Processing and Dispatching for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3413 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Applications
RFC 3414 User-based Security Model (USM) for version 3 of the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMPv3)
RFC 3415 View-based Access Control Model (VACM) for the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3416 Version 2 of the Protocol Operations for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3417 Trans port Mappings for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3418 Management Information Base (MIB) for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3584 Coexistence between Version 1, Version 2, and Version 3 of the Internet-
standard Network Management Framework
SMIv2
RFC 2578 Structure of Management Information Version 2 (SMIv2)
RFC 2579 Textual Conventions for SMIv2
RFC 2580 Conformance Statements for SMIv2
iPASOLINK provides SNMPv3 to support the following function:

3.1.3.1 GET/SET of MIB.

Response the request of PDU (Protocol Data Unit) corresponding to SNMPv3.
Table 3-6 PDU Supported by SNMPv3
Item Description
GetNextRequest Requests the subsequent instance value of specified instance value in the list.
Response Responds to the corresponding various kinds of Request.
SNMPv2-Trap Informs the change of state and troubles. The format is different from SNMP
v1 trap.
GetBulkRequest Requests a number of instance value.
InformRequest Informs an event.
Report Returns a packet if the reportableFlag is set to on.
3.1.3.2 Send Trap

iPASOLINK can send SNMPv2-Trap and InformRequest initiatively to UDP Port
162. IP address of SNMP entity, security level, and user name are required to set the
Trap.
Authentic method and authentic password are required when the security level is
authNoPriv or authPriv. Encryption algorithm and encrypted password are required
when the security level is authPriv.
3.1.3.3 Security (user authentication, session management

and encryption)
SNMPv3 PDU is not authenticated by the community name as v1, v2c., but by the
user name, which requires the user registrations beforehand.
User authentication is carried out when the security level of the sent SNMP request is
authNoPriv or authPriv. The cryptographic hash function of the password is
selectable between MD5 and SHA.
Ciphered communication is enabled by the user authentication when the security

level of the sent SNMP request is authPriv. The cipher algorithm is selectable
between DES and AES. For the ciphered communication, a password must be set
when registering users.
User can also specify an SNMP Engine ID for each NE, which should be 16-byte
long and unique within the network.

3.1.4 NTP
NTP (Network Time Protocol) synchronizes the clocks of the server and associated
clients in a network, which is specified by the following RFCs:
RFC No. Title
RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol (Version 3) Specification, Implementation and

Analysis
RFC 2030 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Version 4 for IPv4, IPv6 and OS
iPASOLINK can be set either as NTP Client or Server. Following shows the available
functions of NTP Client and Server:
3.1.4.1 As NTP Client

When the unicast mode is selected on the NTP Client, the client sends a request to
obtain the current time to the pre-configured server, and then adjusts the clock
according to the replied information. Up to four NTP Severs can be registered via
WebLCT.
When the multicast mode is selected on the NTP Client, the client will listen to the
broadcast of the time server and then adjusts the clock according to the first received
valid broadcast and ignores the broadcasts from remaining servers if exist.
If the NTP Client receives neither a response nor broadcasts, the synchronization
among the Server and Clients cannot be accomplished, which allows to use the
current time of the equipment.
3.1.4.2 As NTP Server

When the unicast mode is selected on the NTP Server, Server will respond the current
time information to the Client.
When the multicast mode is selected, the Server will broadcast the current time
information of its own periodically.

3.1.5 FTP
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) transfers a file among NEs, and specified by the
following RFCs.
RFC No. Title
RFC 959 Original FTP spec.
RFC 1123 The small FTP related section extends / clarifies RFC-959
RFC 2228 FTP security extensions (vsftpd implements the small subset needed to
support TLS / SSL connections)
RFC 2389 Proposes FEAT and OPTS commands
RFC 2428 Essentially IPv6 support
Using iPASOLINK as FTP Server provides the following functions:
3.1.5.1 Data Upload and Download Service

Data upload and download service are available; however the data download is
restricted, which can be operated only by a user with the appropriate privilege (refer
to 2.2.2 User Access Levels).
Files and the directories accessed via FTP protocol are predetermined as well as the
file names and types, which will be downloaded.
3.1.5.2 Session Management

Upon accepting the connection from external device, the system proceeds to the login
authentication process. An unauthorized user is denied.
The default setting of TCP Port 21 to listen and transfer a file on TCP port 20 can be
changed using WebLCT. When Passive Mode is selected, the port number is selected
by the equipment automatically.
If no command is issued by the Client for ninety seconds, the current TCP session
will be disconnected automatically.
3.1.5.3 User Authentication Function

iPASOLINK supports the internal authentication only.

3.1.6 SSHv2
SSHv2 (Secure Shell Version 2) is the protocol for transferring data between the
sever and client (CLI). The SSHv2 is based on the following RFC standards:
transfers a file among NEs, and specified by the following RFCs.
RFC No. Title
RFC 4250 The secure Shell (SSH) Protocol Assignment Numerics
RFC 4261 The Secure Shell (SSH) Protocol Architecture
RFC 4252 The Secure Shell (SSH) Authentication Protocol
RFC 4253 The Secure Shell (SSH) Transport Layer Protocol
RFC 4254 The Secure Shell (SSH) Connection Protocol
Using iPASOLINK as SSHv2 Server enables the following functions:
3.1.6.1 CLI
CLI operation via SSHv2 protocol is available.

Upon at accepting the connection from external device, the system proceeds to the
login authentication process. An unauthorized user is not accepted. The default port
number of SSHv2 Service is 22, which cannot be changed by WebLCT.


3.1.7 SFTP
SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol) securely transfers a file among NEs, using the
mechanism of SSHv2. iPASOLINK uses the SFTP Server to enable the following
functions:
3.1.7.1 Providing Function of Secure File Transfer

In order to establish a secure network for uploading/downloading files, SFTP
function is provided.
3.1.7.2 Data Upload/Download Service

Data upload and download service are available; however, downloading to
iPASOLINK is available only by the user(s) who is/are authorized to write data into
iPASOLINK. Only the designated directories can be accessed by SFTP. For files such
as F/W, FPGA, Configuration Data, etc., their storage path and file names are
designated as well, depending on their types.
If 90 seconds passe without any progress in the file transfer, the file transfer is
canceled.

Upon accepting the connection from external device, the system proceeds to the login
authentication process. An unauthorized user is denied.
If 90 seconds pass without any FTP commands issued from the client, the session is
terminated by the FTP Command Time Out.
SFTP uses the TCP Port #22 by default.
Changing the SSH Connection Port # requires special attention since the Port # of
SSH Connection and that of SFTP connection are the same (cannot change either one
alone).


3.1.8 HTTP
HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) is the protocol for transferring data between
Web server and client (WebLCT).
The HTTP is based on the following RFC standards:
RFC No. Title
RFC 1945 Hypertext Transfer Protocol -- HTTP/1.0
RFC 2616 Hypertext Transfer Protocol -- HTTP/1.1
Using iPASOLINK as HTTP server enables the following functions:
3.1.8.1 WebLCT
WebLCT operation via HTTP protocol is available.

Upon at accepting the connection from external device, the system proceeds to the
login authentication process. An unauthorized user is not accepted.
The default port number of HTTP Service is 80, which can be changed using
WebLCT.

iPASOLINK supports the following two type of authentications:
 External RADIUS Server with Internal Authentication.
 Internal Authentication only.

3.1.9 HTTPS
HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol over SSL/TLS) is the protocol that the
encryption function by SSL is added to HTTP used by Web Servers and Clients (Web
Browser, etc.) for receiving/transmitting data.
The HTTPS is specified by the following standard:
RFC No. Title
RFC 2818 HTTP over TLS
3.1.9.1 Providing Web Contents

Web contents via HTTPS is provided, where the multiple languages are supported.
3.1.9.2 Session Management among External Terminals

HTTPS accepts an access from the external terminal, submits the server certification
to the external terminal, carries out the process of the server authentication based on
the public-key cryptosystem, before the login authentication process. The Port # is
443 by default, which can be changed by WebLCT/SNMP.

 External RADIUS Server with internal authentication.
 Internal authentication only.

3.2 Service Status Setting

Service Status Setting displays the status of service and protocol:
Procedure 3-15
submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting. The
Service Status Setting window appears:
Figure 3-1 Security Management — Service Status Setting

Figure 3-2 Service Status Setting Window (1/2)

Figure 3-3 Service Status Setting Window (2/2)

Figure 3-4 Service Status Indication
Table 3-12 Service Status Indication
Status Description
Running Protocol/Service is enabled.
Stopped Protocol/Service is disabled.

3.3 SNMP
3.3.1 Set SNMP
Procedure 3-16
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management, then its
Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click the SNMP link:
Figure 3-5 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP)
SNMP
The SNMP Setting option window appears.

4. Specify an appropriate value to each parameter.
Figure 3-6 SNMP Setting Option Window
Table 3-13 SNMP Setting Parameters
SNMPv1/v2c Enable Enables SNMPv1/SNMPv2c (Running)
Disable Disables SNMPv1/SNMPv2c (Stopped)
SNMPv3 Enable Enables SNMPv3 (Running)
Disable Disables SNMPv3 (Stopped)
UDP Port 1 to 65535 From 1 to 65535 are available for UDP Port No.
161 161 is the default UDP Port No.
CAUTION: In order to apply the values properly, CPU must be

rebooted when UDP Port Number(s) is/are changed.
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
The Service Status Setting window updates the information.

7. Confirm the displayed SNMP information.
Figure 3-8 Service Status Setting Window

3.4 SNMP Community

This operation registers, modifies, or deletes the SNMP Manager information. Only
the registered SNMP managers have the right to access the equipment. Up to ten
servers can be registered.
3.4.1 Register/Modify SNMP Community
Procedure 3-17
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management, then its
3. Click a Community No. to add.
Figure 3-9 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Community)
SNMP Community numbers

4. The SNMP Community option window appears. Specify the appropriate value
to each parameter:
Figure 3-10 SNMP Community Option Window
(when IP Address Type is IPv4)
(when IP Address Type is IPv6)

Table 3-14 SNMP Community Parameters
Community Name (text field) Specify an SNMP Community Name. Valid value: One to 31
characters long. A request with a different Community
Name will be rejected.
Access Level Admin Specify the user access level. Refer to Table 2-3 User
Access Privilege Levels for details.
Config
Operator
IP Address Type IPv4 Specify the IP Address Type
IPv6
IP Address Type: IPv4
Access Control 1/2/3 Enable Enables to restrict the access to the numbered SNMP
Manager(s). Selecting this option enables the fields below,
for Source IP Address and Subnet Mask.
Disable Disables to restrict the access to the SNMP Manager(s).

Selecting this option disables the fields below.
Source IP Address 1/2/3 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Specifies the valid IP address or network address of the
numbered SNMP Manager(s).
Subnet Mask 1/2/3 x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of the numbered SNMP
Manager(s).
Access Control 1/2/3 Enable Enables to restrict the access to the numbered SNMP
(IPv6) Manager(s). Selecting this option enables the fields below,
for Source IP Address and Prefix Length.
Disable Disables to restrict the access to the SNMP Manager(s).

Selecting this option disables the fields below.
Source IP Address 1/2/3 x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x Specifies the valid IP address or network address of the
(IPv6) numbered SNMP Manager(s).
Prefix Length 1/2/3 (IPv6) 0 to 128 Specify the prefix length for the numbered SNMP
Manager(s).
5. Click the OK button when completed.

The Information dialog box appears.

7. The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm that
the newly added SNMP Community information is displayed.

3.4.2 Delete SNMP Community
Procedure 3-18
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click Delete SNMP Community tool button on the tool bar.
Delete SNMP Community button
The Delete SNMP Community option window appears.
4. Select an SNMP Community No. from the drop-down list, and click the OK
button.
Figure 3-14 Delete SNMP Communication Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.

5. Click the OK button when confirmed.
7. The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm that the
selected SNMP Community information has been removed.

3.5 SNMP Trap Entry

This option configures the SNMP Trap:
3.5.1 Set/Modify SNMP Trap Entry
Procedure 3-19
3. Scroll down the main window till SNMP Trap option box appears.
4. Click SNMP Trap Entry No. of the SNMP Trap Entry field.
Figure 3-18 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Trap Entry)

SNMP Trap Entry No.
The SNMP Trap Entry option window appears.

5. Specify the appropriate value for each parameter:
Figure 3-19 SNMP Trap Entry Option Window
(when IP Address Type is

IPv4)
(when IP Address Type is

IPv6)

Table 3-15 SNMP Trap Entry Parameters (1 of 2)
SNMP Version SNMPv1 Set SNMP Version for Trap.

SNMPv2c
SNMPv3
IP Address Type IPv4 Specify the IP Address Type.
IPv6
PDU Type Trap Available for all SNMP Versions.
Inform This option is available for IPv4 only.
IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the destination IP Address of Trap.
UDP Port 1 to 65535 Set UDP Port of Trap. [default: 162]
Community Name (text field) Enter Community Name of the Trap within 1 to 31 characters long.
This Community Name must be the same on both SNMP Server
and Agent.
AuthNoPriv A user needs authentication but no encryption to log in. Selecting

this option enables Auth Algorithm radio button below.
AuthPriv A user needs authentication and data are encrypted by DES or

AES. Selecting this option enables Priv Algorithm radio button
below.
SNMP Engine ID (text field) Assign a 16 byte value for SNMPv3 Local Engine ID, which must
be unique within the same managed network.
Auth Algorithm MD5 MD5 (Message-Digest algorithm 5) is one of the Hash Algorithm
for authentication and digital signature. In order to detect the falsifi-
cation of original data while transmitting, the Hash is generated
using the original data, which is compared at both ends of commu-
nication path.
SHA SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) is one of the Hash Algorithm for
authentication and digital signature. In order to detect the falsifica-
tion of original data while transmitting, the 160-bit Hash is gener-
ated using the original data that is less than 2 64 bits which is
compared at both ends of communication paths.
Auth Key (read only) Valid value: Eight to 16 digits of MD5 or SHA1 public key. To enter
the Authentication Key, click Set Auth Key button on the tool bar.
Priv Algorithm DES DES (Data Encryption Standard) uses a 56-bit encryption key.
The block size is 64 bits.
AES AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is SPN-Structured block

encryption. The block size is 128 bits, and the length of the key is
128/192/256 bits.
Priv Key (read only) Valid value: Eight to 16 digits. To enter the Privacy Key, click Set
Priv Key button on the tool bar.

Table 3-15 SNMP Trap Entry Parameters (2 of 2)
IP Address (IPv6) x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x Enter the destination IP Address of Trap.
UDP Port 1 to 65535 Set UDP Port of Trap. [default: 162]
Community Name (text field) Enter Community Name of the Trap within 1 to 31 characters long.
This Community Name must be the same on both SNMP Server
and Agent.
AuthNoPriv A user needs au8thentication but no encryption to log in. Selecting

this option enables Auth Algorithm radio button below.
AuthPriv A user needs authentication and data are encrypted by DES or

AES. Selecting this option enables Priv Algorithm radio button
below.
SNMP Engine ID (text field) Assign a 16 byte value for SNMPv3 Local Engine ID, which must
be unique within the same managed network.
Auth Algorithm MD5 MD5 (Message-Digest algorithm 5) is one of the Hash Algorithm
for authentication and digital signature. In order to detect the falsifi-
cation of original data while transmitting, the Hash is generated
using the original data, which is compared at both ends of commu-
nication path.
SHA SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) is one of the Hash Algorithm for
authentication and digital signature. In order to detect the falsifica-
tion of original data while transmitting, the 160-bit Hash is gener-
ated using the original data that is less than 2 64 bits which is
compared at both ends of communication paths.
Auth Key (read only) Valid value: Eight to 16 digits of MD5 or SHA1 public key. To enter
the Authentication Key, click Set Auth Key button on the tool bar.
Priv Algorithm DES DES (Data Encryption Standard) uses a 56-bit encryption key.
The block size is 64 bits.
AES AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is SPN-Structured block

encryption. The block size is 128 bits, and the length of the key is
128/192/256 bits.
NOTE: Security Level and SNMP Engine ID are the only required parameters to set for
registering SNMPv3 (inform).

6. Set the Auth Key:

 Click Set Auth Key tool button to open the Set Auth Key sub-option window.
 Enter the key, and click the OK button.
Figure 3-20 Auth Key Password Setting Option Window
7. Set the Priv Key

 Click Set Priv Key to open the Set Priv Key sub-option window.
 Enter the key, and click the OK button.
Figure 3-21 Priv Key Setting Option Window
8. Click the OK button of the SNMP Trap Entry option window.

10. Confirm that the newly added SNMP Trap Entry information is displayed.

3.5.2 Delete SNMP Trap Entry
Procedure 3-20
3. Click Delete SNMP Trap Entry tool button on the tool bar.
Delete SNMP Trap Entry tool button
The Delete SNMP Trap Entry option window appears.

4. From the drop-down list, select the No. of SNMP Trap Entry to be removed,
and click the OK button.
Figure 3-25 Delete SNMP Trap Entry Option Window
5. Confirmation dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.


The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm that the
selected SNMP Trap Entry information has been removed from the display.

3.6 NTP
3.6.1 Enable NTP
Procedure 3-21
3. Click the NTP link.
NTP
The NTP Setting box appears.

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 3-30 NTP Setting Option Window
Table 3-16 NTP Setting Parameters
NTP Enable Enable/Disable the NTP Protocol on the equipment.
Disable
NTP Server Mode Multicast Specify the NTP Server mode.
Unicast
Disabled
NTP Client Mode Multicast Specify NTP Client mode.
Unicast
Disabled
Stratum 2 to 15 Set Stratum level of the NTP Time Packets. The

lowest Stratum should be received in NTP PDU plus
1.
NTP Authentication Enable Enables the use of NTP Authentication.
Disable Disables the use of NTP Authentication.
Multicast Suth Key Not Used To assign the Auth Key Index, select the index number
Index from the drop-down list. Otherwise, select Not Used.
(available Index #)
Multicast Port NE2 Select a port to output the Multicast Time information.
Bridge01 to Bridege20 This parameter is enabled when NTP Server Mode

selects Multicast.
Multicast Interval 16 to 131072s Select Multicast Interval. [unit: second]

7. The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm the
displayed NTP configuration.
Figure 3-32 Service Status Setting Window (Service Status)
Figure 3-33 Service Status Setting Window (NTP)

3.6.2 NTP Client Status
 Clicking the NTP Client Status link opens the NTP Client Status window:
Figure 3-34 NTP Client Status Window

3.7 NTP Server Address

This operation allows a user to register/modify/delete the NTP Server and its
information.
3.7.1 Register/Modify NTP Server Address
Procedure 3-22
3. Click the No. of the target NTP Server listed in NTP Server Address.
Figure 3-35 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Server Address)
No. of NTP Servers
The NTP Server Address Setting option window appears.

Figure 3-36 NTP Server Address Setting Option Window
Table 3-17 NTP Server Address Setting Parameters
IP Address Type IPv4 Specify the IP Address Type.
IPv6
IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the IP Address of the upper NTP

Server.
IP Address (IPv6) x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x
NTP Version 3 Specify the NTP massage version.
Poll Time 64 to 131072 Set the interval (64 × 2n) for polling NTP
Server. [unit: second; default: 64 sec]
Auth Key Index Not Used Not to use the authentication key.
(available index #) Selects an index number of the registered

authentication key to use.

7. Confirm that the newly added NTP Server Address information is displayed.

3.7.2 Delete NTP Server Address
Procedure 3-23
3. Click Clear NTP Server button on the tool bar.

Clear NTP Server
4. The Clear NTP Server option window appears. From No. drop-down list, select
the number of target NTP Server Address, and the click the OK button:
Figure 3-40 NTP Server Address Setting Option Window

7. The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm that the
selected NTP Server Address information has been removed.

3.8 NTP Auth Key Setting
3.8.1 Create/Modify NTP Authentication Key Setting
Procedure 3-24
3. Scroll down the main window until NTP Auth Key Setting option appears.
4. Click Auth Key Index number.
Figure 3-44 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Auth Key Setting)
Auth Key Index
NTP Auth Key Setting (Modify) Option Window appears.

5. Specify the parameter.

 Clicking the Set Auth Key tool button opens the Auth Key Password option
window.
Figure 3-45 NTP Auth Key Setting (Modify) Option Window
Table 3-18 NTP Auth Key Setting Parameters
Auth Key Index (read only) Indicates the selected Auth Key Index number.
Auth Key ID 1 to 65535 Specify the key ID.
Auth Algorithm (read only) Indicates the specified Auth Algorithm.
Auth Key (8 characters Clicking the Set Auth Key tool button opens the Auth Key
long or more) Password Setting option window. Specify the password, then
click the OK button:
Auth Key Trust Trusted Trusts the configured Authentication Key.
Not Trusted Not to trust the configured Authentication Key.

6. When completed, click the OK button of the NTP Auth Key Setting option
window.
Figure 3-46 NTP Auth Key Setting Option Window
displayed NTP Auth Key Setting information.
Figure 3-48 Service Status Setting (NTP Auth Key Setting)

3.8.2 Remove Registered NTP Authentication Key
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management Setting, then
its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting. The
3. Click Clear NTP Auth Key tool button.
Figure 3-49 Service Status Setting Window

Clear NTP Auth Key tool button
4. Clear NTP Auth Key option window appears. Select an index number of
Authentication Key to be removed.
Figure 3-50 Clear NTP Auth Key Option Window

6. When the process is completed, Information dialog box appears. Click the
OK button to proceed.
7. The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm that
the Auth Key registration of selected index number is removed.
Figure 3-53 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Auth Key Setting)

3.9 FTP
Procedure 3-25
2. Click the Maintenance button to put the system into the Maintenance Mode.
 Verify that the color of MAINT indication turns to yellow.
4. Click the FTP link.
Figure 3-54 Service Status Setting Window (FTP)
Maintenance button
FTP
The FTP Setting option window appears.

5. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter, then click the OK button.
Figure 3-55 FTP Setting Option Window
Table 3-19 FTP Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description Recommended

Value for PNMSj
FTP Always Enable FTP is always in service.

Service Enable
Service Enable Enable FTP service to open or to close on demand. (makes PNMSj
effective)
Service Disable Disables FTP service.
TCP Port 1 to 65535 Set TCP Port of FTP Server (for incoming
21
(Command) commands). [default: 21]
TCP Port 1 to 65535 Set TCP Port of FTP Server (for outgoing
20
(Data) commands) [default: 20]
MAX Session 1 to 3 Specify the maximum number of user sessions at a

1
time. [default: 1]
Auto Stop Enable Auto Stop disconnects a session automatically if no

operation is carried out for 90 seconds.
Enable
Disable FTP Server will not disconnect a session whether or
not a session has an operation.

rebooted when TCP Port Number(s) is/are changed.

displayed FTP information:
Figure 3-58 Service Status Setting Window (FTP)

3.10 SSHv2
Procedure 3-26
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management Setting, then
its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting. The
3. Scroll down the main window until SSHv2 option appears.
4. Click the SSHv2 link.
Figure 3-59 Service Status Setting Window (SSHv2, SFTP)
click
SSHv2/SFTP Setting option window appears.

5. Specify the values, then click the OK button.
Figure 3-60 SSHv2/SFTP Setting Option Window
Table 3-20 SSHv2/SFTP Setting Parameters
SSHv2 Server Enable Enables SSHv2 Server.
Disable Disables SSHv2 Server.
SSHv2 Client Enable Enables SSHv2 Client.
Disable Disables SSHv2 Client.
SFTP Disable See 3.1.7 SFTP.
Enable
Always Enable
Auto Disable Enable
Disable
Service Status Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed SFTP information.
Figure 3-62 Service State Setting Window (Service Status)
Figure 3-63 Service State Setting Window (SSHv2)

3.11 SFTP
Procedure 3-27
3. Scroll down the main window until SFTP option appears.
4. Click the SFTP link.
Figure 3-64 Service Status Setting Window (SFTP)
SFTP
SSHv2/SFTP Setting option window appears.

5. Specify the values, then click the OK button.
Figure 3-65 SFTP Setting Option Window
Table 3-21 SSHv2/SFTP Setting Parameters
SSHv2 Server Enable See 3.1.6 SSHv2.
Disable
SSHv2 Client Enable
Disable
SFTP Disable Disables SFTP service.
Enable Enables SFTP service to open or to close on

demand.
Always Enable SFTP is always in service.
Auto Disable Enable Auto Disable disconnects a session automatically

if no operation is carried out for 90 seconds.
Disable SFTP Server will not disconnect a sessionif a

session has no operation.
Service Status Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed SFTP information.
Figure 3-67 Service State Setting Window (Service Status)
Figure 3-68 Service State Setting Window (SFTP)

3.12 HTTP
Procedure 3-28
3. Scroll down the main window until HTTP option appears.
4. Click the HTTP link.
Figure 3-69 Service Status Setting Window (HTTP)
HTTP
The HTTP/HTTPS Setting option window appears.

Figure 3-70 HTTP/HTTPS Setting Option Window
Table 3-22 HTTP Setting Parameters
HTTP Enable (Running) Enable HTTP service.
Disable (Stopped) Disable HTTP service.
TCP Port 1 to 65535 Set TCP Port of HTTP Server. [default: 80]
HTTPS See 3.13 HTTPS.

———
TCP Port


7. Confirm the displayed HTTP information:
Figure 3-73 Service Status Setting Window (HTTP)

3.13 HTTPS
Procedure 3-29
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Netwrok Management Setting, then its
3. Scroll down the main window until HTTPS option appears.
4. Click the HTTPS link.
Figure 3-74 Service Status Setting Window (HTTPS)
HTTPS
The HTTS Setting option window appears.

5. Set the appropriate values, then click the OK button.
Figure 3-75 HTTP/HTTPS Setting Option Window
Table 3-23 HTTPS Setting Parameters
HTTP See 3.12 HTTP.

———
TCP Port
HTTPS Enable Puts HTTPS Server into service.
Disable Disables HTTPS service.
TCP Port 1 to 65535 Set TCP Port of HTTPS Server. [default: 443]


7. Confirm the displayed HTTPS information:
Figure 3-78 Service Status Setting Window (HTTPS)

3.14 RADIUS Setting
Following provides the settings of Remote Authentication Dial In User Service

Server.
NOTE: This operation is available only by users whose access level is Admin.
 RADIUS Setting
Specifies the method of authentications at login.
 RADIUS Server Setting

Specifies the setting values to User Service Server.
 Clear RADIUS Server

Removes the specified settings of RADIUS Server.

3.14.1 Set RADIUS
Procedure 3-30
submenu Security Management to select RADIUS Setting. The RADIUS
Setting window appears.
3. Click the RADIUS link.
Figure 3-79 RADIUS Setting Window
RADIUS link
RADIUS Setting option window appears.

4. Specify the values, then click the OK button:
Figure 3-80 RADIUS Setting Option Window
Table 3-24 RADIUS Setting Parameters
Timeout 1 to 60 Specifies a period to expire the Accept-Request message. [unit: second[
Retry Count 0 to 5 Specifies the number of times to resend the Accept-Request messages.
Default Operator Specifies the privilege levels to vendor-specific messages that do not have
Permissions the authentication information.
CONFIG
ADMIN
Deny Login
The RADIUS Setting window updates the information.

6. Verify the displayed information.

3.14.2 Set RADIUS Server
Procedure 3-31
expand its submenu Security Management to select RADIUS Setting. The
RADIUS Setting window appears.
3. Click the RADIUS Server No. link.
RADIUS Server No.
RADIUS Server Setting option window for the selected Server appears.

4. In the RADIUS Server Setting option window, specify the values:
Figure 3-84 RADIUS Server Setting Option Window
Set Secret Key button
5. Click the Set Secret Key tool button.
6. The Set Secret Key option window appears. Enter the password as the
authentication key to RADIUS:
Figure 3-85 Set Secret Key Option Window
i) Enter a new password to New Secret Key entry field.

ii) Enter the same password to Re-Enter entry field for confirmation.
iii) Click the OK button. The Set Secret Key option window disappears.
Table 3-25 RADIUS Server Setting Parameters
IP Address x.x.x.x Enter the IP Address of RADIUS Server.
Port No. 1 to 65535 Enter the number of Port connecting for authentication.
Encryption User Communication with a shared key for the authentication by the
Method external server. (RADIUS)
CHAP MD5 with a shared key for the authentication by the external
server (RADIUS).
Secret Key (read only) Indicates the authentication key to RADIUS that is specified by
the Set Secret Key option.

7. When the parameters are specified, click the OK button.
9. The RADIUS Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.

3.14.3 Remove Registered RADIUS Server
Procedure 3-32
expand its submenu Security Management to select RADIUS Setting. The
RADIUS Setting window appears.
3. Click the Clear RADIUS Server tool button.
Clear RADIUS Server tool button
Clear RADIUS Server option window appears.
4. Select the target RADIUS Server number from the No. drop-down list, then
Figure 3-89 Clear RADIUS Server Option Window

3-70/END SECURITY MANAGEMENT
The RADIUS Setting window updates the formation.

EQUIPMENT SETUP 4-1
4. EQUIPMENT SETUP
4.1 Overview
The Equipment Setup allows more detailed settings than those done by the Easy
Setup Wizard. Some parameters are included in the Easy Setup Wizard.
 Set Equipment Mode

Selects VLAN or MPLS-TP for transport networking mode.
NOTE: When the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, supported VLAN
Mode is IEEE802.1Q only. VLAN Mode IEEE802.1ad is currently not
available.
 Equipment Configuration
Specifies NE Name, Switch Group.
NOTES:
1. When the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, supported Switch

Group is 1+0 Configuration only. The 1+1 Switch Group is currently not
available.
2. In the system where the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, MODEM-

AV Card not operational.
 MODEM Migration
Steps required for migrating MODEM, from MODEM-A to MODEM-EA.
NOTE: This option is currently not available when the Equipment Mode is et
to MPLS-TP.
 Radio Configuration
Specifies Channel Spacing, Mode, E1/STM-1 Mapping, RF Frequency for Radio.
NOTE: Radio Traffic Aggregation (RTA) is currently not available when the
Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP
 AMR/Radio Mapping Configuration

Specifies the mode type and range for AMR.

4-2 EQUIPMENT SETUP
4.2 Set Equipment Mode
iPASOLINK VR 10 enables the choice of using MPLS-TP (Multiprotocol Label

Switching – Transport Profile). Select the transport networking method before
starting the procedures.
Procedure 4-1
2. Click the Maintenance button to set the system into the Maintenance mode.
Figure 4-1 Set System into Maintenance Mode
click

EQUIPMENT SETUP 4-3
3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup to select Equipment
Mode Setting.
4. The Equipment Mode Setting window appears. Click Modify tool button on
the tool bar.
Figure 4-2 Equipment Setup — Equipment Mode Setting Window
Modify tool button
5. Equipment Mode Setting option window appears. Select the operating mode,
then Click the OK button:
Figure 4-3 Equipment Mode Setting Option Window

4-4 EQUIPMENT SETUP
Table 4-1 Equipment Mode Setting Parameters
Equipment Mode
Operation Mode VLAN Selects VLAN mode.
MPLS-TP Selects MPLS-TP mode. Selecting this option enables the

MPLS-TP Setting options below.
MPLS-TP Setting
Node ID 0 to 4294967295 Assign an ID that is unique in the network.
ICC A to Z, 0 to 9 Enter the ITU-T Carrier Code. Valid code is 1 to 6 characters

long using A to Z and 0 to 9. ICC should be identical
between the monitored equipment.
VLAN Mode 802.1Q Select VLAN mode. For the system where the Equipment
Mode is set to MPLS-TP, the 802.1ad is currently not
802.1ad supported. (Selecting 802.1ad requires to set Default VLAN
TPID (S-TAG) option below.)
Default VLAN TPID (S-TAG) 8100 to FFFF This option is currently not supported.
(Enter the default VLAN TPID in hex. Valid values are 8100
to FFFF, excluding 86DD, 8808, 8809.)
 Changing to MPLS-TP Mode from VLAN Mode

i) Warning messages appear. Verify the conditions, then click OK buttons to
proceed.
Verify the VLAN TPID.
Check the system if it is okay

to be reset.
ii) The system starts rebooting the equipment, which terminates the WebLCT
session:

EQUIPMENT SETUP 4-5
 Changing to VLAN Mode from MPLS-TP Mode
i). Information dialog box appears. Click OK button to end the procedure.
ii) Proceed with the Shipment operation. Refer to 4.11.6 Restore Factory
Default Settings in the Operation & Maintenance manual.

4-6 EQUIPMENT SETUP
4.3 Equipment Configuration

Configure the equipment setup by registering the installed Cards:
NOTES:
1. When the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, the redundant configuration
of Main Cards is currently not available.
2. In the system where the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, MODEM-AV
Card is not operational.
Procedure 4-2
Following procedure is required where the MC-AV has the redundant option.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup to select Equipment
Configuration.
3. The Equipment Configuration window appears. Click Setup tool button on

the tool bar.
Figure 4-8 Equipment Setup — Equipment Configuration Window
Setup tool button
Equipment Configuration — Step1 option window appears.

EQUIPMENT SETUP 4-7
4. Enter the equipment name to NE Name field, then click the Next button.
Figure 4-9 Equipment Configuration >> Step1 Option Window
Equipment Name
Next button
NOTE: The display on the left shows the current setup, while that on the right is for a
user to edit the configuration.
Table 4-1 E-Line Service Configuration Parameters
NE Name (text field) Enter the equipment name. Valid value is 1 to 32

characters long.
Equipment Configuration >> Step2 option window appears.

4-8 EQUIPMENT SETUP
5. Click the Auto Detect button to fill in a card name for each slot.
 Clicking the Auto Detect button retrieves names of cards that are currently
mounted.
Auto Detect button
6. Confirm that the card names are filled in, then click the Next button.
Figure 4-11 Equipment Configuration >> Step2 Option Window (Auto Detect)
Next button

EQUIPMENT SETUP 4-9
7. Equipment Configuration >> Step3 option window appears.

Under the MODEM / STM SW / XPIC GRP Configuration option box, tick a
box of the slots to configure a group, then select the group type from the
drop-down list:
Check Box Drop-Down List
Next button
Table 4-2 Switch Group Configuration Parameters
Configurations Value/Description
SW/XPIC ——— For 1+0 (No Protection) configuration, remove a tick from the check box.
GRP
1+1 Hot Standby To configure 1+1 Hot Standby, leave a tick in a check box of the target slots,
and select 1+1 Hot Standby from its drop-sown list. This option is currently
not available.
1+1 Twin Path To configure 1+1 Twin Path, leave a tick in a check box of the target slots, and
select 1+1 Twin Path from its drop-down list. This option is currently not
available.
1+0 XPIC To configure 1+0 XPIC, leave a tick in a check box of the target slots, and
select 1+0 XPIC from its drop-down list.
NOTE: The 1 + 1 configuration is available when the SW/XIPC GRP is registered.

4-10 EQUIPMENT SETUP
8. When completed, click the Next button.
9. Equipment Configuration >> Step4 Setting Confirmation Screen window

appears. Confirm that the fields of setup parameters change to blue, then
Figure 4-13 Equipment Configuration >> Step4 Option Window (example)
OK button
10. Warning dialog box appears. Check the conditions according to the message, then
click the OK button to proceed.
When the process is completed, Information dialog box appears.

EQUIPMENT SETUP 4-11
12. The Equipment Setup — Equipment Configuration window updates the

information. Confirm the displayed equipment configuration.
Figure 4-16 Equipment Setup — Equipment Configuration Window (example)

4.4 MODEM Migration

NOTE: When the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP., this option is currently not
available.
Procedure 4-3
1. Turn off the target MODEM-A:

Figure 4-17 MODEM-A Card Front
TOGGLE SWITCH
POWER (PWR) indicator
i) Pull the toggle switch to unlock it, then turn it to the left.
ii) Verify that the power indicator (PWR LED) is off.
3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup to select MODEM
Migration. The MODEM Migration window appears.
4. Click MODEM Migration tool button on the tool bar.

Figure 4-18 MODEM Migration Window
MODEM Migration tool button

5. MODEM Migration >> Step 1 option window appears. Select the target
MODEM-A Cards, or click the Auto Migration button for automatic
assignment,
Figure 4-19 MODEM Migration >> Step 1 Option Window
click Auto Migration button

select MODEM-EA
Card name(s) of the target slot(s) should be replaced with MODEM-EA.

6. Verify that the target slot(s) indicate(s) MODEM-EA, then click Next button.
Next button
MODEM Migration >> Step 2 option window appears.

7. Confirm that the Migration Status indicates Ready, then click the OK button
to proceed.
OK button
NOTE: If the Migration Status indicates Not Ready, turn off the MODEM, and click the
Refresh button.
8. Warning dialog box appears. Check the conditions according to the

message, then click the OK button to proceed.


Now the system is ready for replacement.
Figure 4-23 Information Dialog Box for MODEM Migration
10. Replace the MODEM-A with MODEM-EA.


4.5 Radio Configuration

NOTE: For the system where the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, the Radio
Traffic Aggregation is currently not available.
 Precautions for RTA (Physical Layer) Operation
Following are precautions regarding the RTA (Radio Traffic Aggregation) operation:
1. In the system configuring RTA, signals are not transmitted through unless
their setting values on both associated ends are the same. If either end
enables RTA, the system will keep issuing alarms till values are all fit.
2. If number of available radio channels reduces to one channel due to a

failure, etc., the effective bandwidth will be narrower than that of the end
where RTA is disabled.
3. To replace the MODEM, execute the LOCKIN command that is required in

the 1+1 MODEM system as well.
4. It is recommended to operate the system where the setting values of CS

and MOD on both ends are the same.
5. The system is operational if the MOD values are changed due to AMR
function.
6. If values for CS do not match where the radio bands also differ significantly,
packet loss may occur.
7. Installing an old MODEM to the RTA-enabled system issues the mismatch

alarm.
8. The actual Ethernet bandwidth depends on the packet size.

Procedure 4-4
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup to select Radio
Configuration.
3. The Equipment Setup — Radio Configuration window appears. Click Setup

tool button on the tool bar.
Figure 4-24 Equipment Setup — Radio Configuration Window
Setup tool button
Radio Configuration >> Step1 option window appears.

4. Specify parameters in New Setting option box:
Figure 4-25 Radio Configuration >> Step 1 Option Window
New Setting
Next button
Table 4-3 Detailed MODEM Setting of SW/XPIC GRP or Slot Unit Parameters (1 of 3)
Channel Spacing 7MHz Available Modulations are QPSK to 256 QAM

(for MODEM-A) 14MHz
28MHz Available Modulation: QPSK to 512 QAM

* enabled values depend
on Software License. 40MHz
56MHz

Channel Spacing 7MHz Available Modulation: QPSK to 1024 QAM

(for MODEM-EA and On- 14MHz Available Modulation: QPSK to 2048 QAM
Board MODEM)
28MHz
* enabled values depend 40MHz

on Software License.
56MHz
Channel Spacing 7MHz Available Modulation: QPSK to 1024 QAM

(for MODEM-AV) 14MHz Available Modulation: QPSK to 2048 QAM
* enabled values depend
on Software License.
40MHz
56MHz
112MHz
Reference Modulation QPSK Select a reference modulation from the list. Available
Reference Modulation differs according to the channel
16 QAM spacing to use.
32 QAM This option is enabled depending on the obtained Software
64 QAM License.
128 QAM
256 QAM
512 QAM 1024QAM and 2048QAM are available when the installed
1024 QAM MODEM is On-Board MODEM, MODEM-EA or MODEM-
AV.
2048 QAM
4096QAM is available when the installed MODEM is
4096QAM MODEM-AV.
Radio Mode High Capacity For MODEM-A, High System Gain can be selected when
Channel Spacing is set to 28MHz or higher.
High System Gain
For On-Board MODEM, MODEM-EA and MODEM-AV, the
value is fixed to High Capacity (no options)
E1 Mapping [CH] (read only) These options are specified by AMR/Radio Mapping
Configuration. See 4.6 AMR/Radio Mapping Configuration
STM-1 Mapping [CH] (read only)
ETH Bandwidth [Mbps] (read only) Indicates the Ethernet bandwidth value that is automatically
calculated.
TX RF Frequency [MHz] (up to ODU) Set the frequency at output. See NOTES below.
RX RF Frequency [MHz] (up to ODU) Set the frequency at input. See NOTES below.
Frame ID 1 to 32 Set the Frame ID.

TX Power Control ATPC Selects Automatic Transmitter Power Control
MTPC Selects Manual Transmitter Power Control.
Radio Traffic Not Used This option specifies a member to configure a Radio Traffic
Aggregation Aggregation Group.
Radio GRP1
to w To assign Radio LAG, select Radio GRP1 to Radio GRP2.
Radio GRP2 w When Distribution Mode is Packet Layer, up to 2
MODEMs can be assigned to each Radio GRP.
w When Distribution Mode is Packet Layer, 1+1 MODEM
SWG can also configure Radio GRP. However, different
types of SWGs, such as Twin Path and Hot Standby,
cannot be registered to the same Radio GRP.
w When Distribution Mode is Physical Layer, Radio GRP
can be configured if MODEMs do not belong to the 1+1
MODEM SWG.
w When Distribution Mode is Physical Layer, up to two
MODEMs that are installed in Slots 1 and 2, or Slots 3 and
4, can configure the Radio SWG.
Distribution Mode Packet Layer Selects a mode for the Radio GRP to be registered.
Physical Layer is available for Version 2 only.
Physical Layer
NOTES:
1. In the 1+1 Hot Standby System, the same band value must be set to both
ODUs.
2. In the 1+1 Twin Path System, TX RF Frequency to set must be unique at

each MODEM.
3. Step 1 Option Window appears for number of created Switch Groups.
5. When completed, click the Next button. Radio Configuration >> Step3
Setting Confirmation Screen window appears.
6. Confirm that the fields of setup parameters change to blue, then click the OK
button.

Figure 4-26 Radio Configuration — Step2 Window (example)
OK button
7. Warning dialog box appears. Check the conditions according to the

message, then click the OK button to proceed.
Information dialog box appears.

8. Click OK button to proceed.
9. Confirmation dialog box appears. Click the OK button.
Go to 4.6 AMR/Radio Mapping Configuration, <Arial_10XF>Step 1.

4.6 AMR/Radio Mapping Configuration

Procedure 4-5
Launch the AMR/Radio Mapping Configuration >> Step 1 AMR Operation option
window if it is not displayed:
i) Launch and log in to WebLCT.
ii) In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup to select AMR/Radio
Mapping Configuration. The Equipment Setup — AMR/Radio Mapping
Configuration window appears.
iii) Click the Setup tool button.
Figure 4-30 Equipment Setup — AMR/Radio Mapping Configuration Window
Setup tool button
AMR/Radio Mapping Setup >> Step1 option window appears.

1. Specify parameters in the New Setting option box:
Figure 4-31 AMR/Radio Mapping Configuration >> Step1 Option Window
New Setting
Next button
 Click AMR Mode radio button to enable the options.
 Select other modulations to be used during AMR operation by clicking its/their

Used radio button(s).

Table 4-4 AMR Operation Parameters
AMR Operation AMR Mode Enable AMR (Adaptive Modulation Radio) function.
Non Operation Disable AMR function.
AMR Range QPSK Use QPSK transmits four PSK (2 bits per symbol).
Not Use Disables the use of QPSK.
16QAM Use 16 QAM transmits 4 bits per symbol.
Not Use Disables the use of 16QAM.
1024QAM Use 1024 QAM transmits 10 bits per symbol. Operative for
MODEM-EA and MODEM-AV.
MODEM-EA and MODEM-AV.
MODEM-AV only.
NOTE: A modulation highlighted by light green is the reference modulation that is

specified by the Radio Configuration.
3. AMR Configuration >> Step2 window appears. Specify parameters in the

New Setting option box:

Figure 4-32 AMR/Radio Mapping Configuration >> Step2 Option Window
New Setting
Next button
 Enter priorities to modulations under the E1 Mapping for the use during the
AMR operation.
 For the STM-1 Through mode, select a modulation scheme to be used during
AMR operation, and enter the available radio capacity. The remaining capacity of
Ethernet Bandwidth is calculated automatically.
Table 4-5 E1/STM-1 Mapping
Value
Parameter Description
E1 Mapping STM-1 Mapping ETH Bandwidth
QPSK 0 to 152 0 to 2 Calculated from The number of total channels
16QAM 0 to 152 0 to 2 E1 and STM-1 cannot exceed the limitation of the
Mappings. specified modulation.
32QAM 0 to 152 0 to 2
64QAM 0 to 152 0 to 2
128QAM 0 to 152 0 to 2
256QAM 0 to 152 0 to 2
512QAM 0 to 152 0 to 2
1024QAM 0 to 152 0 to 2
2048QAM 0 to 152 0 to 2

 Step 1 AMR Operation window and Step 2 E1/STM-1 Mapping window

appear for each SW Group.
5. Confirm that the fields of modified parameters change to blue, and then click
the OK button.
Figure 4-33 AMR/Radio Mapping Configuration — Step3 Window
OK button
6. Warning dialog box appears. Check the conditions according to the message,
then click the OK button to proceed.

8. AMR/Radio Configuration window updates the information. Confirm that all

parameters are set.
Figure 4-36 AMR/Radio Mapping Configuration Window

4-30/END EQUIPMENT SETUP

NETWORK MANAGEMENT 5-1
5. NETWORK MANAGEMENT
5.1 Overview
This menu allows a user to check and configure the network management parameters
of NEs to be managed by the network management system.
 Port/VLAN Setting
This option determines the use of Ethernet Port, MODEM Port and Inband
Management VLAN, which enables or disables the connection to the NMS.
 Bridge Setting
This option specifies the IP Address of NE Branch (Ethernet Port, MODEM Port,
Inband Management VLAN).
 LLDP Setting
This option configures the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP).
 Routing Setting
This option configures the static route information.
 IP Access Control Setting

This setting allows a user to filter IP packets on both the incoming and outgoing
interfaces. The filter can be effective on all the management interfaces except LCT
Port,
 ARP Setting
This option configures the static ARP Information.
 DHCP Server/Relay Setting

This setting allocates IP addresses to user ports via inband VLAN. For DHCP
Server, up to 3 IP subnets, and for DHCP Relay, up to 4 IP subnets are available.
 Adjust Current Date and Time

This operation adjusts the date and time on an NE.

5-2 NETWORK MANAGEMENT
5.2 Port/VLAN Setting
5.2.1 Ethernet Port Setting
Procedure 5-1
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management Setting to

select Port/VLAN Setting. The Port/VLAN Setting window appears.
3. Click Ethernet Port Setting link.
Figure 5-1 Ethernet Port Setting Window
Ethernet Port Setting

4. Ethernet Port Setting option window appears. Specify parameters:
Figure 5-2 Ethernet Port Setting Option Window
Table 5-1 Ethernet Port Setting Parameters (1 of 2)
Item NMS ——
NE1 ——
Port Mode (read only) Indicates the current port mode.
Port Usage Used Set to use or not to use the Port for NMS/NE1.
Not Used
Speed Status (read only) Indicates the current speed.
Duplex Status (read only) Indicates the current duplex status.

Table 5-1 Ethernet Port Setting Parameters (2 of 2)
VLAN Setting
VLAN Port Type Access Select VLAN Port Type for the NMS Port. Selecting
Trunk enables the NMS Management setting options
Trunk below.
NMS Management 1 to NMA Management 4
VLAN Usage Used Set to use or not to use the VLAN for the NMS Port.
Not Used
VLAN ID 2 to 4094 Assign VLAN ID to the NMS Port.
CoS 0 to 7 Assign the Class of Service.
LCT Port Setting
Port Usage Used Set to use or not to use WebLCT.
Not Used
Restrict LCT Any Not to restrict the WebLCT connection.

Connection
Only to Local NE Allows the local NE only to connect WebLCT.
Only to Neighbor NE Allows the neighbor NE on the radio links only to

connect WebLCT. This option is available when the IP
Address Type is IPv4.
6. Warning dialog box appears. Check the condition according to the message,
7. Information dialog box appears.Click the OK button to proceed.

The Ethernet Port Setting option box in the Port/VLAN Setting window
updates the information.

8. Confirm that all the parameters are set:
Figure 5-5 Port/VLAN Setting Window

5.2.2 MODEM Port Setting
Procedure 5-2

3. Click MODEM Port Setting link.
MODEM Port Setting

4. MODEM Port Setting option window appears. Specify parameters:
Figure 5-7 MODEM Port Setting Option Window
Table 5-2 MODEM Port Setting Parameters
ITEM MODEM ——
Port Usage Used Set to use or not to use the MODEM Port.
Not Used
M-Plane Bandwidth Limitation
Bandwidth Limitation Enable Set to limit or not to limit the M-Plane bandwidth.
Disable
Bandwidth 500 to 2000 Set the limitation of M-Plane bandwidth. [unit: kbps]
M-Plane Priority
CoS 0 to 7 Assign the priority.
Highest

7. The MODEM Port Settng option box in the Port/VLAN Setting window
updates the information. Confirm that all the parameters are set.

5.2.3 Inband Management VLAN Setting
The procedure to set Inband Management VLAN differs according to the use of
VLAN mode on the user interfaces.
5.2.3.1 For VLAN Mode 802.1Q
Procedure 5-3

3. Click Inband Management VLAN Setting link.
Inband Management VLAN Setting

4. Inband Management Setting option window appears. Specify parameters:
Figure 5-11 Inband Management VLAN Setting Option Window
Table 5-3 Inband Management VLAN Setting Parameters
ITEM Inband Management ——
VLAN Usage Used Set to use or not to use VLAN.
Not Used
VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Assign the VLAN ID to the Inband Management VLAN.
CoS 0 to 7 Assign the Class of Service
VLAN Tag Setting
VLAN Tag Type C-Tag Enables the use of C-Tag to the Inband Management VLAN.
S-Tag Enables the use of S-Tag to the Inband Management VLAN.
The Inband Management VLAN Setting option box in the Port/VLAN Setting
window updates the information.


5.2.3.2 For VLAN Mode 802.1ad

NOTE: This option is currently not when the Equipment Mode is set to
MPLS-TP.
Procedure 5-4

3. Click Inband Management VLAN Setting link.
Inband Management VLAN Setting
Inband Management Setting option window appears.

4. Specify parameters:
Figure 5-15 Inband Management VLAN Setting Option Window
clicking S-VLAN ID link opens

S-VALN Mapping option window
Table 5-4 Inband Management VLAN Setting Parameters
ITEM Inband Management ——
VLAN Usage Used Set to use or not to use VLAN.
Not Used
VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Assign the VLAN ID to the Inband Management VLAN.
CoS 0 to 7 Assign the Class of Service
S-VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Select the S-VLAN ID on the user interfaces to be mapped

Mapping to the inband Management VLAN
VLAN Tag Setting
VLAN Tag Type C-Tag Enables the use of C-Tag to the Inband Management VLAN.
S-Tag Enables the use of S-Tag to the Inband Management VLAN.

The Inband Management VLAN Setting option box in the Port/VLAN Setting
window updates the information.

5.2.4 VLAN Setting Link
 Clicking the VLAN Setting link moves to the 8.4 VLAN Setting window under
the category of ETH Function Setting in Provisioning.
Figure 5-18 Link to VLAN Setting Window
Link to VLAN Setting window

5.3 Bridge Setting

Procedure 5-5

select Bridge Setting. The Bridge Setting window appears.
3. Click Setup tool button on the tool bar.
Figure 5-19 Bridge Setting Window
Setup tool button
The Bridge Setting option window appears.

Figure 5-20 Bridge Setting Option Window
Table 5-2 Bridge Setting Parameters (1 of 2)
IP Stack Mode IPv4 Selects IPv4 for the IP operating mode.
(NOTE: To change the value here, DHCP IPv6 Selects IPv6 for the IP operating mode.
Server/Relay should be disabled. See 5.9 Dual Selects Dual Stack for the IP operating
DHCP Server/Relay Setting.) mode.
Default Gateway
Configuration IPv4 Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the address of default gateway.
IPv6 Address x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x Enter the address of default gateway.
Interface Bridge 01 to 08 Select the interface.
Status IPv6 Address (read only) Indicates the address of default gateway.
Interface (read only) Indcates the selected the interface.

Table 5-2 Bridge Setting Parameters (2 of 2)
Bridge 01 to 08
Bridge Usage Used To enable the Bridge use, select Used.

Not Used
Bridge IP Address x.x.x.x Enter the IP Address to assign.
Bridge Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Enter the subnet mask.
Link Local Address Auto Manual Select the configuration method, Selecting
Configuration Manual enables the fields for Link Local
Link Layer Address and Link Local Address Prefix
Length below.
Link Local Address fe80::xxxx Enter the link local address.
Link Local Address Prefix Length 64 (Prefix length is 64.)
Global Address Auto Manual Select the configuration method.

Configuration Selecting Manual enables the fields for
Link Layer Global Address and Global Address
Prefix Length below.
Global Address xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx Enter the global address.

:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx
Global Address Prefix Length 1 to 128 Enter the Prefix Length value.
Router Advertisement Sending Enable Enables/Disables the generation of Router
Advertisement
Disable
Router Advertisement Default 0 Not to specify the Default Lifetime.

Lifetime
600 to 9000 Specify the Default Lifetime of Router
Advertisement.
Primary IP Address (check box) Tick a box to select a port to be

accommodate in the Bridge.
NMS (check box)
NE1 (check box)
MODEM (check box)
Management VLAN Usage Use Set to use or not to use the Management
VLAN. Selecting Used enables the
Not Use Management VLAN ID option below.
Management VLAN ID (check box) Enter the VLAN ID.
STP Auto Configuration Auto Select an option to configure STP

automatically or manually.
Manual
STP Usage Used Set to use or not to use the STP.
Not Used


8. Bridge Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed

information.
Figure 5-23 Bridge Setting Window (1/2: on the left)

Figure 5-24 Bridge Setting Window (2/2: to the rightmost)

5.4 View IPv6 Address Information

Procedure 5-6

select IPv6 Address Table. The Bridge Setting window appears.
Figure 5-25 IPv6 Address Table Window
Export tool button

Table 5-3 IPv6 Address Table Parameters
Prefix Table
Prefix Indicates the address prefix to which this entry’s addressing information pertains.
Length Indicates the prefix length associated with the prefix.
Type Indicates the address type of this prefix.
Origin Indicates the origin of this prefix.
On Link Flag Indicates the on-link determination flag of this prefix.
Autonomous Flag Indicates the autonomous address configuration flag of this prefix.
Preferred Lifetime [s] Indicates the remaining length of time, in seconds, that this prefix will continue to
be preferred.
Valid Lifetime [s] Indicates the remaining length of time, in seconds, that this prefix will continue to
be valid.
Interface Indicates the interface on which this prefix is configured.
Address Table
Address Indicates the iP address to which this entry’s addressing information pertains.
Type indicates the type of this address.
Scope indicates the scope of this address.
Origin Indicates the origin of this address.
Status Indicates the state of this address.
Created [s] Indicates the time, in seconds, that this address was created.
Last Changed [s] Indicates the time, in seconds, that this address was last updated.
Interface Indicates the interface on which this address is configures.
 To save the data:
i). Click the Export IPv6 Address Table Information tool button.
ii) Click Save button. The exporting process starts.
iii) When completed, “....completed.” message appears.
This step ends the procedure

5.5 LLDP Setting
Procedure 5-7

select LLDP Setting. The Bridge Setting window appears.
3. Click Setup tool button on the tool bar.
Figure 5-26 LLDP Setting Window
Setup tool button
4. LLDP Setting option window appears. Specify parameters.
Figure 5-27 LLDP Setting Option Window

Table 5-5 LLDP Setting Parameters
TX Interval 5 to 32767 Specify the transmission interval. [unit: second]
TX Hold 2 to 10 Specify the time-to-live value expressed as a multiple of TX

Interval. [unit: times]
Item / Port NMS ——
NE1 ——
Link (read only) Indicates the current state.
LLDP Usage Used Select to set Use or Not to Use the Link Layer Discovery Protocol.
Selecting Used enables the LLDP Mode option below.
Unused
LLDP Mode Standard Enables to run the standard LLDP MAC.
Proprietary MAC Enables to run NEC proprietary LLDP MAC. This option is helpful
to locate an iPASOLINK where an L2SW discarding standard
LLDP frames is in between two iPASOLINKs’ management ports.
7. LLDP Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed

information.
Figure 5-29 LLDP Setting Window

5.6 Routing Setting

This operation specifies the static route for the particular network or IP Address.
5.6.1 Routing Protocol Usage
Procedure 5-8

select Routing Setting. The Routing Setting window appears.
3. Click a link of Routing Protocol.
Figure 5-30 Routing Setting Window
click
4. Routing Setting — Routing Protocol option window appears. Select Used or

Not Used by clicking its radio button, then click the OK button.
Figure 5-31 Routing Setting — Routing Protocol Option Window

Table 5-6 Routing Setting — Routing Protocol Parameters
Routing Protocol Used Enable the use of Routing Protocol.
Nor Used Disables the use of Routing Protocol.
6. The Routing Setting window updates the information. Confirm that the newly
added route information is displayed.

5.6.2 Configure IPv4 Static Route
5.6.2.1 Add Routing Setting
Procedure 5-9

3. In the IPv4 Static Route tabbed page, click Add tool button on the tool bar.
Add tool button
Routing Setting (Add) option window appears.

4. Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask Address, and Gateway Address, then
Figure 5-35 Routing Setting (Add) Option Window
Table 5-4 Routing Setting (Add) Parameters
IP Address x.x.x.x Enter the IP Address.
Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Enter the subnet mask.
Gateway x.x.x.x Enter the gateway address.

5.6.2.2 Modify Routing Setting
Procedure 5-10
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management

Configuration to select Routing Setting. The Routing Setting window
appears.
3. In the IPv4 Static Route tabbed page, click the linked IP address of the
target object.
click the link
Routing Setting (Modify) option window appears.

4. Modify parameter(s), then click the OK button.

Figure 5-39 Routing Setting (Modify) Option Window
6. The Routing Setting window updates the information. Confirm the display for
the modified information.

5.6.2.3 Delete Routing Setting
Procedure 5-11

3. In the IPv4 Static Route tabbed page, click Delete tool button on the tool bar.
Delete tool button
Routing Setting (Delete) option window appears.

4. Enter the target address into the IP Address field, then click the OK button.
Figure 5-43 Routing Setting (Delete) Option Window
The Routing Setting option window updates the information.

7. Confirm that the selected network address has been removed.
Figure 5-46 Routing Setting Option Window

5.6.3 Configure IPv6 Static Route
5.6.3.1 Add Routing Setting
Procedure 5-12

3. In the IPv6 Static Route tabbed page, click Add tool button on the tool bar.

Add tool button
4. Routing Setting (Add) option window appears. Enter the value to each item,
then click the OK button:
Figure 5-48 Routing Setting (Add) Option Window

Table 5-5 Routing Setting (Add) Parameters
Destination Address x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x Enter the destination address.
Prefix Length 0 to 128 Specify the network prefix value. [unit: bit]
Next Hop x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x Enter the address of the next hop.
Interface available Bridge # Assign the interface by selecting the Bridge

number.

5.6.3.2 Modify Routing Setting
Procedure 5-13
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management Configuration

to select Routing Setting. The Routing Setting window appears.
3. In the IPv6 Static Route tabbed page, click a linked IP address of the target
object.
click the link
4. Routing Setting (Modify) option window appears. Modify parameter(s), then

Figure 5-52 Routing Setting (Modify) Option Window

6. The Routing Setting window updates the information. Confirm the display for
the modified information.

5.6.3.3 Delete Routing Setting
Procedure 5-14

3. In the IPv6 Static Route tabbed page, click Delete tool button on the tool bar.
Delete tool button
Routing Setting (Delete) option window appears.

4. Tick the check box of the target address, then click the OK button.
Figure 5-56 Routing Setting (Delete) Option Window
The Routing Setting option window updates the information.

7. Confirm that the selected network address has been removed.
Figure 5-59 Routing Setting Option Window

5.6.4 View Routing Table
Procedure 5-15

3. Click the Routing Table tab. Te Routing Table displays the IPv6 Destination
information.
Routing Table tab
Table 5-6 Routing Table Parameters
Destination Address Indicates the destination IP address of this route.
Destination Type indicates the type of the destination address.
Prefix Length Indicates the number of leading bits that from the mask to be logical-ANDed with
the destination address before being compared to the value in the Destination
Address field.
Next Hop Indicates the address of the next system enroute on the remote routes.
Next Hop Type Indicates the type of the next hop address.
Protocol Indicates the routing mechanism via which this rout was learned.
Metric Indicates the primary routing metric for this route.
Interface Indicates the interface that identifies the local interface through which the next hop
of this route should be reached.

5.7 IP Access Control Setting
5.7.1 Input Filter List
5.7.1.1 Add Entry
Procedure 5-16

to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control Setting window
appears.
3. In the Input Filter List tabbed page, click the Add Entry tool button on the tool
bar.
Figure 5-61 IP Access Control Setting Window
Input Filter List tab

Add Entry tool button
The Input Filter Entry (Add) option window appears.

4. Specify the filter condition:
Figure 5-62 Input Filter Entry (Add) Option Window
Table 5-7 Input Filter Entry (Add) Parameters

Entry No. 1 to 50 Specify the entry number.
Input Index Any Select the ingress port.
Bridge01 to Bridge08
Source IP Address x.x.x.x Specify the source IP Address of the incoming packets.
(0.0.0.0: Any)
Source Subnet x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of the source IP Address of the
Mask incoming packets. (0.0.0.0: Any)
Protocol Any Selects no specific Protocol.
ICMP Selects Internet Control Message Protocol.
TCP Selects TCP/IP Protocol. Selecting this option enables the
Destination Port option.
UDP Selects User Datagram Protocol. Selecting this option
enables Destination Port option.
Other Selecting Other enables the field below to set the Port
Number. Valid values are 1 to 255.
Destination Port Any (check box)  Check (leave a tick in the check box) to set no specific
port for the destination.
 Uncheck (remove a tick from the check box) to specify
the destination port.
1 to 65535 Select a port for the destination.
Action Permit Allows the packets that meet the specified conditions.
Deny Discards the packets that meet the specified conditions.

NOTE: Filter entries are applied to whole DCN traffic except LCT port. The traffic via
LCT is controlled by LCT Port Setting that is in the General Setting (Detail) of
Network Management Configuration menu. For in-band interface, filter entries
are applied to the traffic that is toward the CPU of IDU where the traffic is sent to
the next hop.
The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.
7. Confirm that the newly added filter information displayed.

5.7.1.2 Modify Entry
Procedure 5-17

to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control Setting window
appears.
3. In the Input Filter List tabbed page, click the Entry No. of the target.
Entry Number(s)
The Input Filter Entry (Modify) option window appears.

4. Specify the filter condition, then click the OK button.
Figure 5-66 Input Filter Entry (Modify) Option Window
Table 5-8 Input Filter Entry (Modify) Parameters
Entry No. (read only) Indicates the selected Entry No.
Input Index Any Selects the ingress port.
Source IP Address x.x.x.x Specify the source IP Address of the incoming packets.
Source Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of the source IP Address of the
incoming packets.
Protocol Any Selects no specific Protocol.
ICMP Selects Internet Control Message Protocol.
TCP Selects TCP/IP Protocol. Selecting this option enables

the Destination Port option.
UDP Selects User Datagram Protocol. Selecting this option

enables the Destination Port option.
Other Selecting Other enables the field below to set the Port
Numbers.
Destination Port Any (check box)  Check (leave a tick in the check box) to set no specific
 Uncheck (remove a tick from the check box) to specify
the destination port.
Action Permit Allows the packets that meet the specified conditions.
Deny Discards the packets that meet the specified conditions.

7. Confirm that the modified filter information is displayed.
Figure 5-68 IP Address Control Setting Window

5.7.1.3 Delete Entry
Procedure 5-18
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management to select IP

Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control Setting window appears.
3. In the Input Filter List tabbed page, click the Delete Entry tool button on the
tool bar.

Delete Entry tool button
4. The Input Filter Entry (Delete) option window appears. Enter the target Entry
No., then click the OK button.
Figure 5-70 Input Filter Entry (Delete) Option Window

6. Information dialog box appears.Click the OK button.
7. The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information. Confirm that
the selected filter information has been removed.

5.7.1.4 Modify Rule
Procedure 5-19

3. In the Input Filter List tabbed page, click the Modify Rule tool button on the
tool bar.
Modify Rule tool button
4. The Input Filter Rule option window appears. Set the filter conditions:
Figure 5-75 Input Filter Rule Option Window

Table 5-9 Input Filter Rule Parameters
Input Filter Rule Enable Enables the configured input filters.
Disable Disables the configured input filters.
Default Action Permit Forwards an IP packet that does not meet the configured
conditions.
Deny Discards an IP packet that does not meet the configured

conditions.
7. The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information. Confirm that
the modified filter information is displayed

5.7.2 Forwarding Filter List
5.7.2.1 Add Entry
Procedure 5-20

3. In the Forwarding Filter List tabbed page, click the Add Entry tool button on
the tool bar.
Figure 5-78 IP Access Control Window
Add Entry tool button Forwarding Filter List tab
The Forwarding Filter Entry (Add) option window appears.

4. Set the filter conditions:
Figure 5-79 Forwarding Filter Entry (Add) Option Window
Table 5-10 Forwarding Filter Entry (Add) Parameters (1 of 2)
Entry No. 1 to 50 Enter the entry number.
Output Index Any Selects the egress port.
Source IP x.x.x.x Specify the Source IP Address to output packets.

Address
Source Subnet x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of the Source IP Address for
Mask output packets.
Destination IP x.x.x.x Specify the Destination IP Address to output packets.

Address
Destination x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of the Destination IP Address

Subnet Mask for the output packets.

Table 5-10 Forwarding Filter Entry (Add) Parameters (2 of 2)
Protocol Any Select a Protocol for the IP Packets.
ICMP w Selecting Other requires to set port numbers.

w Selecting TCP or UDP enables the Source Port and
TCP
Destination Port options.
UDP
Other
Source Port Any (check box) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to set no specific
port for the source.
1 to 65535 Select a port for the source.
Destination Port Any (check box) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to set no specific
Action Permit Forwards a packet that meets the conditions above.
Deny Discards a packet that meets the conditions above.

7. Confirm that the newly added filter information is displayed.
(Scrolled to the rightmost field)

5.7.2.2 Modify Entry
Procedure 5-21
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand
Network Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access
Control Setting window appears.
3. In the Forwarding Filter List tabbed page, click the Entry No. of the target:
Forwarding Filter List tab

Entry Number(s)
Forwarding Filter Entry (Modify) option window appears.

4. Modify the filter conditions:
Figure 5-83 Forwarding Filter Entry (Modify) Option Window
Table 5-11 Forwarding Filter Entry (Modify) Parameters (1 of 2)
Entry No. (read only) Indicates the selected Entry No.
Output Index Any Selects the egress port.
Source IP Address x.x.x.x Specify the Source IP Address to output packets.
Source Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of the Source IP Address
for output packets.
Destination IP Address x.x.x.x Specify the Destination IP Address to output

packets.
Destination Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of the Destination IP
Address for the output packets.

Table 5-11 Forwarding Filter Entry (Modify) Parameters (2 of 2)
Protocol Any Select a Protocol for the IP Packets.
ICMP w Selecting Other requires to set port numbers.

w Selecting TCP or UDP enables the Source Port
TCP
and Destination Port options.
UDP
Other
Source Port Any (check box) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to set no
specific port for the source.
1 to 65535 Select a port for the source.
Destination Port Any (check box) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to set no
specific port for the destination.
Action Permit Forwards a packet that meets the conditions above.
Deny Discards a packet that meets the conditions above.

7. Confirm the display for the modified filter conditions.
(Scrolled to the rightmost field)

5.7.2.3 Delete Entry
Procedure 5-22

3. In the Forwarding Filter List tabbed page, click the Delete Entry tool button
on the tool bar.

Delete Entry tool button
4. Forwarding Filter Entry (Delete) option window appears. Enter the Entry No.
of the target, then click the OK button.
Figure 5-87 Forwarding Filter Entry (Delete) Option Window

7. Confirm that the selected filter information has been removed.

5.7.2.4 Modify Rule
Procedure 5-23 Forwarding Filter List — Modify Rule

3. In the Forwarding Filter List tabbed page, click the Modify Rule tool button
on the tool bar.
Modify Rule tool button
4. Forwarding Filter Rule option window appears. Modify the filter condition:
Figure 5-92 Forwarding Filter Rule Option Window

Table 5-12 Forwarding Filter Rule Parameters
Forwarding Filter Enable Enables the configured forwarding filters.

Rule
Disable Disables the configured forwarding filters.
Default Action Permit Forwards an IP packet that does not meet the
configured conditions.
Deny Discards an IP packet that does not meet the

configured conditions.
7. The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information. Confirm the
display for the modified filter information.

5.8 ARP Setting
5.8.1 View ARP Cache
Procedure 5-24
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management to select ARP
Setting. The ARP Setting window appears.
3. Click the ARP Cache tab. The ARP Cache data appears.
Figure 5-95 ARP Setting Window

ARP Cache tab
Table 5-13 ARP Cache Parameters
IP Address (read only) Indicates the IP Address corresponding to the media-

dependent ’physical’ address.
MAC Address (read only) Indicates the media-dependent ’physical’ address.
Type (read only) Indicates the type of mapping.
State (read only) Indicates the Neighbor Unreachability Detection state

for the interface when the address mapping in this
entry is used.

5.8.2 Static ARP
5.8.2.1 Add Static ARP
Procedure 5-25
3. In the Static ARP tabbed page, click the Add tool button on the tool bar.
Add tool button Static ARP tab
4. ARP Setting (Add) option window appears. Enter the IP Address and MAC
Address to assign ARP configuration.
Figure 5-97 ARP Setting (Add) Option Window

Table 5-14 ARP setting Parameters
IP Address x.x.x.x Enter the IP address.
MAC Address x.x.x.x Enter the MAC Address.
7. The ARP Setting window updates the information. Confirm the display for the
added ARP information.

5.8.2.2 Modify Static ARP Setting
Procedure 5-26
3. In the Static ARP tabbed page, click the IP Address link of target Static ARP.
click Static ARP tab
ARP Setting (Modify) option window appears.

4. Modify the MAC Address to assign ARP configuration.
Figure 5-101 ARP Setting (Modify) Option Window
7. The ARP Setting window updates the information. Confirm the display for the
modified ARP information.

5.8.2.3 Delete Static ARP Setting
Procedure 5-27
3. In the Static ARP tabbed page, click the Delete tool button.
Delete tool button Static ARP tab
ARP Setting (Modify) option window appears.

4. Tick a box of target address to remove. Ticking a box on top selects all the
registered addresses.
Figure 5-105 ARP Setting (Delete) Option Window
Tick this box

to select all
The ARP Setting window updates the information.

8. Confirm the display for the removed ARP information.

5.9 DHCP Server/Relay Setting
5.9.1 Set DHCP Server
Procedure 5-28
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management to select DHCP
Server/Relay Setting.
3. The DHCP Server/Relay Setting window appears. Click DHCP No.
Figure 5-109 DHCP Server/Relay Setting Window
DHCP number
DHCP Server/Relay Setting option window appears.

4. Select DHCP Server from the Server/Relay drop-down list, and specify the
remaining options:
Figure 5-110 DHCP Server/Relay Option Window
Table 5-15 DHCP Server/Relay Setting Parameters
Server/Relay Disable Not to use DHCP. When the IP Stack Mode of Bridge Setting
needs to be modified, this option should be disabled.
DHCP Server Set DHCP Server.
DHCP Relay Do not select this choice here.
Bridge No. (IP (available No and Registered and available Bridge numbers (IP addresses) is/are
Address) IP addresses) listed to be selected.
DHCP Server Address —— This option is enabled when the choice is DHCP Relay.
IP Address Range 192.168.xxx.xxx Specify the starting address of the range of Class C Private IP
(Start) Address.
IP Address Range 192.168.yyy.yyy Specify the ending address of the range of Class C Private IP
(End) Address.
Exception (Start) ***.***.***.*** Specify the starting address of the exceptional IP Address
range.
Exception (End) ***.***.***.*** Specify the ending address of the exculpation IP Address
range,
Security Any No security (allows any MAC address)
Only Registered Allows only clients that have the registered MAC Addresses to
lease IP address.

5. Click the Detail link (lower right of the option window).
6. DHCP Server Detail Setting option window appears. Specify the parameters:
Figure 5-111 DHCP Server Detail Setting Option Window
Table 5-16 DHCP Server Detail Setting Parameters

Lease Time 0 to 72 [h] Specify a period of leasing IP Address. [unit: hour]
Default Gateway Same as Bridge Set the same Default Gate Way as that of Bridge Interface to
Address Interface lease. The Bridge numbers have been selected by the Network
Management procedures.
Specify Specify the Default Gateway Address.
Disabled No Default Gateway will be leased.
DNS Server Address Used Selects to use DNS Server.
Not Used Selects not to use DNS Server.
Primary —— When the option above (DNS Server Address) selects Used,
these options are enabled. Specify the Primary and Secondary
Secondary ——
addresses of DNS Server.
Other Option Used To set more parameters below, select Used.
Not Used To ignore setting the parameters below, select Not Used.
ID 0 to 255 Select an ID number as the additional information.

Table 5-16 DHCP Server Detail Setting Parameters

Type IP Address Selecting this option allows to enter the IP Address into the
Value field below.
String Selecting this option allows to enter the alpha-numeral
characters into the Value field below.
Octet String Selecting this option allows to enter the information by octet
strings into the Value field below.
Value —— Enter the additional information by the selected method above.
7. When completed, click the OK button to close the DHCP Server Detail Setting
option window.
8. Click the OK button to close the DHCP Server/Relay Setting option window.
10. The DHCP Server/Relay Setting window updates the information. Confirm
the display for the modified filter information.

5.9.2 Set DHCP Relay
Procedure 5-29 Set DHCP Relay
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management to select DHCP
Server/Relay Setting.
3. The DHCP Server/Relay Setting window appears. Click DHCP No..
DHCP number
DHCP Server/Relay Setting option window appears.

4. Select DHCP Relay from the Server/Relay drop-down list, and specify the
remaining options:
Figure 5-115 DHCP Server/Relay Option Window
Table 5-17 DHCP Server/Relay Setting Parameters
Server/Relay Disable Not to use DHCP. When the IP Stack Mode of Bridge
Setting needs to be modified, this option should be
disabled.
DHCP Server Do not select this choice here.
DHCP Relay Set DHCP Relay.
Bridge No. (IP Address) (available No and Registered and available Bridge numbers (IP addresses)
IP addresses) is/are listed to be selected.
DHCP Server Address 192.168.xxx.xxx This option is enabled when the choice is DHCP Relay.
IP Address Range (Start) —— These options are disabled for DHCP Relay setting.
IP Address Range (End) ——
Exception (Start) ——
Exception (End) ——
Security ——



the displayed information.

5.9.3 MAC Address
5.9.3.1 Add MAC Address
Procedure 5-30
1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Network Management Setting to select

DHCP Server/Relay Setting.
2. The DHCP Server/Relay Setting window appears. Click Add MAC Address
tool button.
Add MAC Address tool button
The Add MAC Address option window appears.

3. Specify appropriate values.
Figure 5-119 Add MAC Address Option Window
Table 5-18 Add MAC Address Parameters
MAC Address aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff Specify MAC Address.
Distribution Auto IP Address is assigned automatically.

Rule
Reject Rejects the specified MAC Address.
Fixed Fixes the address manually. Selecting this option

enables the IP Address option below.
IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Class C Private Address for Fixed distribution.
The DHCP Server/Relay Setting window updates the information.

6. Confirm the display for the added MAC Address information.

5.9.3.2 Modify MAC Address
Procedure 5-31

2. The DHCP Server/Relay Setting window appears. Click the number of target
MAC Address to modify.
click
The Modify MAC Address option window appears.

3. Modify the value(s).
Figure 5-123 Modify MAC Address Option Window
Table 5-19 Modify MAC Address Parameters
MAC Address aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff Specify MAC Address.
Distribution Auto IP Address is assigned automatically.

Rule
Reject Rejects the specified MAC Address.
Fixed Fixes the address manually. Selecting this

option enables the IP Address option below.
IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Class C Private Address for Fixed distribution.
The DHCP Server/Relay Setting window updates the information.

6. Confirm the display for the modified MAC Address information.

5.9.3.3 Delete MAC Address
Procedure 5-32

2. The DHCP Server/Relay Setting window appears. Click the Delete MAC
Address tool button.
Delete MAC Address tool button
The Delete MAC Address option window appears.

3. Tick a box of the target MAC Address to remove. Ticking a box on top selects
all the registered MAC Addresses.
Figure 5-127 Delete MAC Address Option Window
Tick this box

to select all


the display for the removed MAC Address(es).

5.9.3.4 Release IP Address Forcibly
Procedure 5-33

2. The DHCP Server/Relay Setting window appears. Click Forced Release IP

Address tool button.
Forced Release IP Address tool button
The Modify MAC Address option window appears.

3. Tick a box of the target IP Address to release its assignment. Ticking a box on
top selects all the registered addresses.
Figure 5-132 Delete MAC Address Option Window
Tick this box

to select all


the display for the released IP Address.

5.10 Adjust Current Date and Time

Procedure 5-34
1. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Network Management Setting to
select Date/Time Setting. The Date/Time Setting window appears.
2. Click the Modify tool button.
Figure 5-136 Date/Time Setting Window
Modify tool button
3. Date/Time Setting dialog box appears. Enter the appropriate values. See Table
5-20 also:
Figure 5-137 Date/Time Setting Box
click
clicking Today button sets

the current date in Date field

5-92/END NETWORK MANAGEMENT
Table 5-20 Configuration Data to Upload
Data Description
Date Enter a date [month/day/year]; or select a date from the

calender.
Time Enter the current time [hour:minute:second].
Time Zone Set the Time Zone by adding/reducing hours to/from GMT.
Range: Hours [+15 to –15] and Minutes [00 to 59].
Display PC Time Tick this box to synchronize the clock of WebLCT and that of
local PC.
6. The Date/Time Setting window updates the information. Check the date and
time settings:
Figure 5-139 Date/Time Setting Window

PROVISIONING 6-1
6. PROVISIONING
6.1 Overview
The setup procedures provided here are for furthering the system’s fundamental
configuration upon completion of the equipment setup. The setting items are listed as
follows:
 Set MODEM Function

Configures the port, radio switch, ATPC/MTPC power, etc., for each selected
MODEM.
 Set ETH Function

Configures the Ethernet Port, VLAN ETH OAM, RSTP, QoS, Link Loss
Forwarding, etc.
 Set MPLS-TP Function
Configures the MPLS-TP Port, LSP, PW, MPLS-TP OAM, Linear Protection, etc.
 Set Cross Connection Using E1/STM-1 Port

Configures the E1 port, STM-1 port and cross connect.
 Set PWE Function

Configures the TDM PWE (SAToP) function.
 Set Equipment Clock and Synchronization

Sets the internal clock, external clock, and timing source.
 Assign Alarm/AIS Settings

Configures the OW buzzer.
G
 Assign Alarm/AIS Settings

Sets the alarm severity and relevant settings of AIS.
 Assign PMON/RMON Settings

Sets the threshold of PMON (except Ethernet)/ RMON (Ethernet).
For details, refer to the relevant sections accordingly.

6-2/END PROVISIONING

Set MODEM Function 7-1
7. Set MODEM Function
7.1 Overview
Users can configure the port, radio switch, ATPC/MTPC power, etc., for each
selected MODEM:
 MODEM Port Setting

Specifies the port name of each MODEM.
 Radio Switch Setting

Specifies the TX/RX switch priority that prevents from unnecessary switching.
NOTE: This option is currently not available.
 TX Power Setting
Specifies the threshold of TX power and RX power in MTPC/ATPC configuration.
 ALM Mode Setting

Specifies the ATPC power mode and ALM mode for ODU communication failure.
 XPIC Setting
Specifies the XPIC configuration.
 AMR Setting
Specifies the AMR Switching condition.

7-2 Set MODEM Function
7.2 MODEM Port Setting

Specify the Port Name to each MODEM:
Procedure 7-1
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then its submenu
MODEM Function Setting to select MODEM Port Setting. The MODEM Port
3. Click a desired MODEM to configure:
Figure 7-1 MODEM Port Setting Window
click
MODEM Port Setting option window appears.

4. Specify the parameters, then click the OK button:

Figure 7-2 MODEM Port Setting Option Window
Table 7-1 MODEM Port Setting Parameter (1 of 2)
Port Name (text field) Specify a Port Name. Valid value: 0 to 32 characters long.
Local Compression Mode
Support Version (read only) Indicates the Version number.
VLAN Mode (read only) Indicates the selected VLAN mode.
Header Disable Disables Header Compression function.

Compression
Mode MAC Compresses a part of MAC Address only.
MAC with IPv4 Compresses MAC Address and up to IPv4 (MAC with IPv4), IPv6
(MAC with IPv6), or parts of MAC Address and MPLS (MAC with
MAC with IPv6 MPLS).
MAC with MPLS This option is available for the following types of MODEM only:
•On-Board MODEM (MC-AV, Main Card)
•MODEM-A: NWA-055300-102/302/322
• MODEM-EA: NWA-074398-322/422/522

Table 7-1 MODEM Port Setting Parameter (2 of 2)
Payload (check box) Tick (leave a tick in the check box) to compress the Ethernet packets.
Compression This function is available when the installed MODEM is the following
type:
•On-Board MODEM (MC-AV)
•MODEM-EA: NWA-074398-522
Remote Compression Mode
Support Version (read only) Indicates the retrieved information.
VLAN Mode
Header Com-
pression Mode
Payload
Compression
Radio Transmission Mode
Transmission Low Latency Selecting this mode allows to suppress the delay in the packet
Mode transmission of the radio section.
Low PDV Selecting this mode allows to suppress the Packet Delay Variation
(PDV) in the packet transmission of the radio section. This mode is
available when the installed MODEM is the following type:
• On-Board MODEM (MC-AV)
• MODEM-EA: NWA-074398-322/422/522
• FPGA Version: 6.00 or lager
• MODEM Parameter: 8 or later
Radio Transparent Clock Setting
Transparent Enable Enabling this function reflects the radio transmission delay on the
Clock Setting correction field in the PTP Packet of IEEE1588v2.This function is
(see NOTE) Disable available when the installed MODEM is the following type
• On-Board MODEM (MC-AV)
• MODEM-EA: NWA-074398-322/422/522
• FPGA Version: 7.00 or later
• MODEM Parameter: 13 or later
NOTE: Enable or Disable setting must match at both the local and
its opposing sites. If the settings of this option do no match,
the connection is interrupted. Ensure to make the same
settings for both sites, especially when setting remotely.
5. Warning dialog box appears. Check if it is okay to interrupt the Radio Link,


7. The MODEM Port Setting window updates the information. Confirm the
displayed information.
Figure 7-5 MODEM Port Setting Window (1/3: on the left)
Figure 7-6 MODEM Port Setting Window (2/3: in the middle)
Figure 7-7 MODEM Port Setting Window (3/3: to the rightmost)

7.3 Radio Switch Setting

NOTE: This option is currently not available.
Specify the TX/RX SW priority, TXSW locking usage, and TX SW reverse function
usage. This operation configures the following items:
TX SW Priority
Specifies the TX switch priority in transmit direction. (For Hot-Standby System
only.)
TX SW Lock-In Usage

Enabling this function prevents the system from causing TX switching repeatedly
in case of a cable problem between IDU and ODU.
TX SW Reverse Function Usage

This function enables to carry out the local TX switch if the destination side detects
the TX transmit failure from the local station.
RX SW Priority
Specifies the RX switching priorities. (For Hot-Standby system and Twin-Path
system only.)
RX SW Condition Early Warning

Allows a choice to add the Early Warning to the RX Switching condition.

Procedure 7-2
MODEM Function Setting to select Radio Switch Setting. The Radio Switch
3. Click a desired SW GRP to configure:

Figure 7-8 Radio Switch Setting Window
click
Radio Switch Setting option window appears.


Figure 7-9 Radio Switch Setting Option Window
Table 7-21 Radio Switch Setting Parameter
TX SW Priority No. 1 Selecting this option reverts/assigns online mode to No. 1

whenever No. 1 recovers or is in normal operation.
Non Priority This option sets Non-Revertive mode.
TX SW Lock-in Usage Used Enables to lock the TX SW operations. Available only when the
TX SW Priority is set to No.1. If switching operations are
carried out for more than 10 times within 10 minutes, TX will be
locked on to No. 2, which will be released after 24 hours when
No. 1 recovers or has no failure.
Not Used Disables to lock the TX SW operation.
TX SW Reverse Used Enables the Reverse Function. Available only when the TX SW
Function Usage Priority is set to Non Priority. If both ODUs at the local site fail
to receive signals from the opposing site, a silent alarm is output
to the destination end to carry out the forced switch replacing the
working ODU to the standby ODU.
Not Used Disables the Reverse Function.
RX SW Priority No. 1 Selecting this option reverts/assigns online mode to No. 1

(see NOTE) whenever No. 1 recovers or is in normal operation.
Non Priority This option sets Non-Revertive mode.
RX SW Condition Included Early Includes the Early Warning in the switch factor by an automatic
Early Warning Warning switch.
Excluded Early Excludes the Early Warning in the switch factor by an automatic
Warning switch.
NOTE: This option is not supported by MODEM-A with FPGA Version earlier than 1.17.
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears


7. The Radio Switch Setting window updates the information. Confirm the
displayed parameters.
Figure 7-11 Radio Switch Setting Window

7.4 TX Power Setting

Specify the thresholds of TX Power and RX Power in MTPC/ATPC configuration.
7.4.1 ATPC Mode
Procedure 7-3
MODEM Function Setting to select TX Power Setting. The TX Power Setting
window appears.
3. Click a desired MODEM/SW GRP No. to configure:

Figure 7-12 TX Power Setting Window
click
4. TX Power Setting option window appears. Assign the appropriate value to each
parameter:
Figure 7-13 TX Power Setting Option Window

Table 7-22 TX Power Setting Parameters (ATPC)
ATPC Range (MAX) Sets the maximum level of ODU TX Power for
(Range of values depends ATPC Mode. [unit: dBm]
ATPC Range (MIN) on the ODU type.) Sets the minimum level of ODU TX Power for
ATPC Mode. [unit: dBm]
MTPC TX Power —— (Not editable)
RX Threshold –90 to –30 Set the input threshold level for when the
destination end is in ATPC Mode.

7. The TX Power Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
parameters.

7.4.1.1 MTPC Mode
Procedure 7-4
MODEM Function Setting to select TX Power Setting. The TX Power Setting
window appears.

click
4. TX Power Setting option window appears. Assign the appropriate value to each
parameter:
Figure 7-17 TX Power Setting Option Window

Table 7-23 TX Power Setting Parameters (MTPC)
ATPC Range (MAX) ——— (Not editable)
ATPC Range (MIN) ——— (Not editable)
MTPC TX Power (Range of values depends Set the TX Power level in MTPC Mode.
on the ODU type.)
RX Threshold –90 to –30 Set the input threshold level for when the
destination end is in ATPC Mode.

The TX Power Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed parameters.


7.5 ALM Mode Setting

Specify the ATPC Power Mode and ALM Mode in case IDU fails in communicating
with ODU.
Procedure 7-5
MODEM Function Setting to select ALM Mode Setting. The ALM Mode

Figure 7-20 ALM Mode Setting Window
click
4. ALM Mode Setting option window appears. Assign the appropriate value to
each parameter:
Figure 7-21 ALM Mode Setting Option Window

Table 7-24 ALM Mode Setting Parameters
ATPC Power Mode MAX Increases the TX Power to the maximum value.
MIN Decreases the TX Power to the minimum value.
Hold Holds the TX Power at the current value.
ODU COMM ALM Mode Mute Mutes the TX Power if IDU fails in communicating with ODU.
Hold Holds the TX Power if IDU fails in communicating with ODU.
NOTE: When the MTPC Mode is selected, ATPC Power Mode option is disabled.

7. The ALM Mode Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
parameters.
Figure 7-23 ALM Mode Setting Window

7.6 XPIC Setting

Specify the ODU Operation against the LO REF condition.
Procedure 7-6
MODEM Function Setting to select XPIC Setting. The XPIC Setting window
appears.
3. Click a desired XPIC GRP No. to configure:

Figure 7-24 XPIC Setting Window
click
4. XPIC Setting option window appears. Assign the appropriate value to each
parameter:
Figure 7-25 XPIC Setting Option Window

Table 7-25 XPIC Setting Parameters
XPIC Condition - Local Fail Mute Enables the Mute Control against ODU [default]
REF LO. -> Self LO. Suspends the XPIC function on MODEM, where
signals from ODU are output as they are.
XPIC Pair Mute Mode Enable Enabling this function mutes the ODU on the
opposing site if its associated ODU or MODEM on
Disable the local site is failed. [default: Disabled]

7. The XPIC Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
parameters.
Figure 7-27 XPIC Setting Window

7.7 AMR Setting

This procedure specifies conditions to carry out the AMR switching operation where
the AMR Mode is enabled. See 4.6 AMR/Radio Mapping Configuration for
enabling AMR.
Procedure 7-7
MODEM Function Setting to select AMR Setting. The AMR Setting window
appears.

Figure 7-28 AMR Mode Setting Window
click
AMR Setting option window appears.

4. Select a condition to carry out AMR Switch operation:

Figure 7-29 AMR Setting Option Window
Table 7-26 AMR Setting Parameters
AMR Switch CNR + RSL Carries out AMR by CNR To use this mode, the AMR Range (see 4.6
Condition when the modulation AMR/Radio Mapping Configuration) should
scheme is downward (e.g., be set as the following example:
512QAM to QPSK); or by
RSL when the modulation
scheme is the upward (e.g.,
QPSK to 512QAM),
[default]
CNR Carries out AMR by CNR.
 To enable the switching range, all the values

between the upper and lower limits must also
be set to Used.
 Example above shows that the values of
512QAM to 2048QAM are all set to Used, to
enable the range of 512QAM to 2048QAM.
AMR Sensitive AMR Switching Sensitivity (TX Power), Sensitive AMR Transition mode.
Transition
Normal AMR Switching Sensitivity (TX Power), Normal AMR Transition mode.
CNR (Carrier-to-Noise Ratio): Automatically operates AMR If the noise within the carrier
wave increases.
RSL (Received Signal Level): Operates AMR by the receiving signal power.

7-20/END Set MODEM Function

The AMR Mode Setting window updates the information.

Figure 7-31 AMR Mode Setting Window

Set ETH Function 8-1
8. Set ETH Function
8.1 Overview
The ETH Function Setting provides the following options, which are required in
either traffic of VLAN mode or MPLS-TP mode:
 Equipment Setting
Equipment Setting provides the Bridge Setting, Maximum Frame Size Setting, and
FDB Aging Time (under the Other Setting option). Bridge function is also known as
the switching function, which enables the device in the multiple network segments
can communicate with each other. User can configure the FDB (forward database)
aging time, default VLAN ID and VLAN mode here.
NOTE: For the system where the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP,
VLAN mode currently supports 802.1Q only. 802.1ad is to be
supported in future releases.
 ETH Port Setting

This function provides the abilities that configure the attributes of the Ethernet port
on the front panel of iPASOLINK, including port name, line speed, Mode, Flow
Control etc.
NOTE: For the system where the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, 10
GbE Interface is currently not available.
 VLAN Setting
VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) enables multiple devices that are separated
physically can communicate as they are located in a same broadcast domain and also
protect the data from sending to other domain even they may connect physically.
This function provides the abilities of creating, configuring and deleting the VLAN.
NOTE: For the system where the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP,
VLAN Swap is currently not available, and is to be supported in future
releases.
 FDB Setting
iPASOLINK can learn the MAC address of the Ethernet frame dynamically and save
the port — MAC address mapping information into FDB (Forwarding DataBase)
based on 802.1d for each VLAN. User can also add the static mapping information
manually by this function.
In the MPLS-TP mode, LAG setting is available only on ports whose MPLS-TP Port
Mode is UNI (VLAN-Based) only.

8-2 Set ETH Function
 ETH OAM Setting
iPASOLINK supports Ethernet OAM function based on ITU-T ITU-T G.8013/

Y.1731 and 802.1ag, which enables network operators to measure the Ethernet link
quality such as delay, throughput, jitter, loss, etc., and is helpful for the maintenance
and troubleshooting.
In the MPLS-TP mode, OAM MEP (Maintenance Entity Group End Point) setting is
available only on ports whose MPLS-TP Port Mode is UNI (VLAN-Based) or UNI
(Port-Based). OAM MIP (Maintenance Entity Group Intermediate Point) setting is
available on ports whose MPLS-TP Port Mode is UNI (VLAN-Based) only.
 RSTP/MSTP Setting — RSTP Setting
iPASOLINK supports RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol), which prevents from
the layer 2 level link loop by a faster manner comparing to the legacy STP protocol.
Users can set the priority of the bridge; specify the role of the Ethernet port and other
parameters.
In the MPLS-TP mode, RSTP setting is available on ports whose MPLS-TP Port
Mode is UNI (VLAN-Based) only. If the port is assigned for the use of MPLS-TP
traffic, RSTP cannot be set on the port.
 RSTP/MSTP Setting — MSTP Setting
MSTP (Multiple Spanning-Tree Protocol) defined by the IEEE802.1s is the

spanning-tree protocol working with the logical instances. One instance can include
multiple VLANs. Blocking port is decided per logical instance, and then physically
configured redundant Ethernet Topology can be utilized efficiently.
In addition to the standard MSTP features, iPASOLINK supports the root-guard

feature that prevents an unexpected node being the root node, and the BPDU-guard
feature that discards a BPDU frame if it arrives.
In the MPLS-TP mode, MSTP setting is available on ports whose MPLS-TP Port
Mode is UNI (VLAN-Based) only. If the port is assigned for the use of MPLS-TP
traffic, MSTP cannot be set on the port.
NOTE: MSTP and ERP do not operate simultaneously at the same
equipment.

 ERP Setting
High-speed protection switch and load balancing are realized by G.8032 Ethernet
Ring Protection. The maintenance can be done with minimum service affecting by
the administrative operation, such as manual/forced switching.
 Load balancing works under the normal operation, and the higher priority traffic
can be secured by QoS management.
 Fast Switch-over (<50ms) with 3.3ms period, hardware based ETH-CC.
 Administrative operation:
– Forced switching
– Manual switching
– Multi-Ring
– Revertive / Non-revertive
The combination of logical ring set-up and load balancing achieves double capacity
transmission.
In the MPLS-TP mode, ERP setting is available on ports whose MPLS-TP Port Mode
is UNI (VLAN-Based) only. If the port is assigned for the use of MPLS-TP traffic,
ERP cannot be set on the port.
 Link Aggregation Setting
Link Aggregation achieves high capacity and resiliency transport with bundling
several radio links. The distribution algorithm distributes the packet according to:
 L2 Based: Source & Destination MAC, VLAN ID, Ethernet type, Physical Port
ID. [VLAN Mode / MPLS-TP Mode]
 L3 Based: Source & Destination IP, Source & Destination TCP/UDP Port
Number. [VLAN Mode / MPLS-TP Mode]
 MPLS Label Based: Tunnel Label & VC Label. [VLAN Mode only]
 MPLS-TP Based: Distribution Rule is automatically selected according to the
ingress frames. (See 8.9.2 Frame Distribution Rules in MPLS-TP Mode for
details.) [MPLS-TP Mode only]
Also, ETH Ports support Both of LACP and Non-LACP operation with carrier class
1:1 LACP Protection.
In the MPLS-TP mode, LAG setting is available on ports whose MPLS-TP Port
Mode is NNI/UNI (VLAN-Based) only. These for UNI (Port-Based) will be

 Radio Traffic Aggregation: Packet and Physical Layer

NOTE: For the system where the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, this
function is currently not available.
iPASOLINK has two types of Radio Traffic Aggregation: Packet Layer and Physical
Layer. The feature of Radio Traffic Aggregation (Packet Layer) is similar to that of
Link Aggregation without LACP.
Radio Traffic Aggregation (Physical Layer) function achieves the high capacity and
resiliency transport with bundling two Modem links.
 Fragments packets for the variable length, and distributes the fragmented packets
to two radio links fairly with a patent pending algorithm.
 Provides redundancy to the radio link. The traffic can be carried by the remaining
links if the bandwidth decreases due to a failure.
 Using Radio Traffic Aggregation (Physical Layer) and XPIC simultaneously, the
high-capacity transport is enabled by a single-antenna.
 QoS/Classification Setting
iPASOLINK supports QoS control function that provides different priority to

different applications, users, or data flow or to guarantee a certain level of
performance to a data flow. User can configure Class Classification, Ingress Policer,
Egress QoS and SP, TDM E1 QoS on MODEM to realize differential service strategy.
The Classification setting is available only on ports that are assigned to the Port-
Based QoS mode. Shaper setting is currently not available.
 Filter Settings
This function provides layer2 filtering parameter database based user-plane

discarding filter for solving security issue.
 Parameters: multiple combination of MAC DA/SA, CoS, Ether Type, VLAN ID
with "any" or "wildcard" description
 Filter profile based easy to use configuration
 L2CP Transparent Setting
L2CP Transparent transport function is useful for L2CP tunneling, especially MEF 9
Compliant ETH Private Line (EPL) Service. Transported L2CP protocols can be
specified by checking boxes independently.
When the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, L2CP Transparent setting is available
on ports whose MPLS-TP Port Mode is UNI (VLAN-Based) only.

 Mirroring Setting
Port Mirroring enables to monitor the traffic at another (mirrored) port without traffic
of source port interruption. Ingress, egress or both directions of the port to be
mirrored to the destination port can be specified.
 Port Isolate Setting

NOTE: For the system where the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, this
option is currently not available.
Port isolation can restrict the transmission even within the same VLAN. Ports which
are configured as port isolation cannot communicate with another same VLAN port.
Also, broadcast traffic is not transmitted. This function can protect the user traffic
from the attacks such as being executed from inside own network (same subnet).
 LLF Setting
LLF (Link Loss Forwarding) is the function that mandatory shuts down the port on
the destination NE if local NE detects unidirectional link problem.
 Broadcast Storm Control Setting
This function discards flooding frames in a specific interface without transferring.

This function can set also flooding transferring control in unit of ETH port including
MODEM port. By specifying the bandwidth of broadcast frame, multicast frame, and
unknown address Unicast frame collectively, frames beyond the specified band are
discarded at the circuit input.
When the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, this option is available for ports
whose MPLS-TP Port Mode is UNI (Port-Based, VLAN-Based), but is not available
for NNI ports.

8.2 Equipment Setting

When the selected Equipment Mode is MPLS-TP, use the Equipment Setting
procedures provided in 9. Set MPLS-TP Function section.
8.2.1 Bridge Setting
Procedure 8-1
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then its submenu ETH
Function Setting to select Equipment Setting. The Equipment Setting
window appears.
3. Click the Bridge Setting link on the option box.
Figure 8-1 Equipment Setting Window
Bridge Setting
Bridge Setting option window appears.


Figure 8-2 Bridge Setting Option Window
Table 8-1 Bridge Setting Parameters
VLAN Mode 802.1Q Allows the port for different VLANs to communicate with
each other through a Layer-3 network device.
802.1ad Allows the switches in a service provider network to

transparently carry customer’s Layer-2 control frames,
separate from the service provider’s traffic and from other
traffic in the service provider’s network.
Default VID 1 to 4094 Enter the default VID of the equipment. [default: 1]
Default VLAN TPID (C-Tag) 0x Specifies the TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier) value of VLAN.
8100 to FFFF [default: 8100 (in mode 802.1Q)]
Default VLAN TPID (S-Tag) Specifies the TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier) value of VLAN.
[default: 88a8 (in mode802.1ad)]

The Equipment Setting window updates the information.



8.2.2 Max Frame Size Setting
Procedure 8-2
window appears.
3. Click the Max Frame Size Setting link on the option box.
Max Frame Setting
Max Frame Size Setting option window appears.

NOTE: For the system using the 802.1ad mode, the S-Tag size plus 4
bytes should be added to the value to be set.
Figure 8-6 Max Frame Size Setting Option Window
Table 8-2 Max Frame Size Setting Parameters
GbE MAX Frame Size 64 to 9600 Specifies the maximum frame size for a GbE
(Giga-bit Ethernet) port. [unit: byte]
FE MAX Frame Size 64 to 2000 Specifies the maximum frame size for an FE (Fast
Ethernet) port. [unit: byte]



Figure 8-8 Bridge Setting Window

8.2.3 Other Setting
Procedure 8-3
window appears.
3. Click the Other Setting link on the option box.

Other Setting
Other Setting option window appears.


Figure 8-10 Other Setting Option Window
Table 8-3 Other Setting Parameters
Aging On/Off On Enables the FDB (Forwarding Data Base) to delete the learnt
MAC Address if it is not updated for a certain period specified
by the FDB Aging Time.
Off Disables the Aging function.
FDB Aging Time 5 to 163680 Specifies the aging time period when the Aging function is
enabled. [unit: second]





8.3 ETH Port Setting

Procedure 8-4
Function Setting to select ETH Port Setting. The ETH Port Setting window
appears.
3. Click the desired Port No. to configure.

Figure 8-13 ETH Port Setting Window
Port No.
ETH Port Setting option window appears.


Figure 8-14 ETH Port Setting Option Window
Table 8-4 ETH Port Setting Parameters (1 of 2)
Port Usage Enable Enable the port administratively.
Disable Shut down the port administratively.
Port Name (text field) Enter the Ethernet Port name. Valid value is zero to 32 characters long.
10GbE Usage Enable Specifies to use the port as 10 Gbit/s Ethernet interface.
Disable Specifies not to use the port as 10 Gbit/s Ethernet interface.
Media Type Electrical Specifies the SFP Port to the Electrical use
Optical Specifies the SFP Port to the Optical use.
Speed AUTO Sets Autonegotiation to select the speed at establishing each link.
Selecting AUTO disables Duplex and MDI and MDIX options below.
10Mbps Specifies 10 Mbit/s rate.
Duplex Full Fixed to Full duplex mode only.

Table 8-4 ETH Port Setting Parameters (2 of 2)
MDI and MDIX MDI Specifies the port media type. This option is disabled when the Speed
option selects AUTO.
MDIX
Flow Control Enable Enables the Flow Control function.
Disable Disables the Flow Control function.
Sync ETH Enable Sets to Enable or Disable the Synchronous Ethernet.
Disable NOTE: When the RJ45 port supporting the 1Gbit/s enables Sync ETH,
specifying this port to the Equipment Clock Reference forcibly assigns
and fixes this port to Slave. In this circumstance, if the opposing site
has the same settings as well, the Ethernet link will not be able to get
established.
LLDP Usage Enable Selects to use LLDP.
Disable Selects not to use LLDP.
LLDP Mode Standard Enables to run the standard DP MAC.
Proprietary Enable to run NEC proprietary LLDP MAC. This option is helpful to
MAC locate an iPASOLINK where L2SW discarding standard LLDP frames is
in between two iPASOLINKs’ management ports.
ALS Usage Enable Sets to enable/disable the Automatic Laser Shutdown function. This
option is available for optical ports only.
Disable
ALS Interval 60 [s] Sets the delay time to release the port from the ALS state when the
alarm is cleared. [unit: second, default: 60 seconds]
180 [s[
300 [s]

The ETH Port Setting window updates the information.


Figure 8-16 ETH Port Setting Window (1/2: scroll to the left)
Figure 8-17 ETH Port Setting Window (2/2: scroll to the right)

8.4 VLAN Setting

NOTE 4.
Register VLANs and/or S-VLANs as necessary. For the registrations,
following should be considered:
NOTES:
1. When the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, a VLAN setting specified

here will be initialized if its MPLS-TP Port Mode is changed.
2. When the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP where the MPLS-TP Port
Mode is NNI or UNI (Port Based), VLAN is specified for the Management
VLAN.
3. When the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP where the MPLS-TP Port
Mode is UNI (VLAN-Based), VLAN should be specified for both the
Management VLAN and VLAN Traffic.
4. Since iPASOLINK VR in the MPLS-TP mode currently does not support
802.1ad, S-VLAN is currently not available in the MPLS-TP mode.
8.4.1 Add VLAN/S-VLAN ID
Procedure 8-5
Function Setting to select VLAN Setting. The VLAN Setting window appears.
3. In the VLAN List tabbed page, click the Add VLAN ID button on the tool bar.
Figure 8-18 VLAN Setting Window — VLAN List Tab (example: 802.1Q)
VLAN List tab
Add VLAN ID tool button

4. The Add VLAN ID option window appears. Specify VLAN ID (for 802.1Q) or S-
VLAN ID (for 802.1ad; currently not supported) and VLAN Service Name:
Figure 8-19 Add VLAN ID Option Window (example: 802.1Q)
Table 8-5 Add VLAN ID Parameters
VLAN ID [For 802.1Q] Enter VLAN ID.

1 to 4094
S-VLAN ID [For 8021.ad] Enter S-VLAN ID.
In the MPLS-TP mode, this option is currently not available.
VLAN Service Name (text field) Enter VLAN Service Name. Valid value is 1 to 32 characters
long.
NOTE: Multiple VLAN IDs can be entered using comma(s) and/or hyphen as shown
below:
VLAN ID:1,2,3,1000-4094
VLAN Service Name:(VLAN Name)
i) By the example above, VLAN IDs of 1, 2, 3, and 1000 to 4094, that is, 3098
IDs in total are registered. The order of entering IDs has no special rule, which
means that entering in the order of 1000-4094,1,3,2 is available as well.
ii) The VLAN ID entry field in the Filter option box indicates 1–20 by default,
which is only to limit the number of VLAN IDs to display in the beginning.
Entering a specific number or a range (e.g., 4000–4094 for VLAN IDs 4000 to
4094) retrieves VLAN IDs as entered. To display all, remove the entry to leave
the field blank, and click the Search button.
iii) When registering multiple VLAN IDs, -xxxx (xxxx: 0001 to 4094) is
automatically added to each VLAN Service Name. The maximum number of
characters for a VLAN Service Name is 27.
iv) If (an) automatically generated VLAN Service Name(s) within the multiple
VLAN IDs to be registered already exist(s), that/those VLAN ID(s) will be
registered without VLAN Service Name(s).
However, for a single entry, the entered VLAN Service Name will be registered
as it is though the name has already been registered.

If (a) VLAN ID(s) within the multiple VLAN IDs to be registered already
exist(s), that/those VLAN ID(s) is/are ignored (in other words, not to overwrite
the existing IDs), but the remaining VLAN IDs will be registered.

7. The VLAN Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
parameters.
Figure 8-21 VLAN Setting Window— VLAN List Tab (example: 802.1Q)

8.4.2 Modify VLAN Service Name
Procedure 8-6
3. In the VLAN List tabbed page, select the target object by clicking the VLAN
Service Name.
Figure 8-22 VLAN Setting — VLAN List Tab (example: 802.1Q)
VLAN List tab select a target object
Modify VLAN Service Name option window appears.

4. Enter the modified/new name into the VLAN Service Name text box, then click
the OK button.
Figure 8-23 Modify VLAN Service Name Option Window (example: 802.1Q)

parameters.
Figure 8-25 VLAN Setting Window (example: 802.1Q)

8.4.3 Delete VLAN/S-VLAN ID
Procedure 8-7
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH
3. In the VLAN List tabbed page, click the Delete VLAN ID tool button on the tool
bar.
VLAN List tab
Delete VLAN ID tool button
The Delete VLAN ID option window appears.

4. Enter the VLAN ID / S-VLAN ID or VLAN Service Name to be removed:

Figure 8-27 Delete VLAN ID Option Window — by VLAN ID (example: 802.1Q)
Multiple numbers (range, and/or individuals) can be

entered as well.
e.g., Range: 2–15
Individuals: 2,4,15
Figure 8-28 Delete VLAN ID Option Window — by VLAN Service Name

NOTE: A VLAN ID that has (an) assignment(s) cannot be removed. Check
other settings if the target VLAN ID is not removed from the list.


The VLAN Setting window updates the information.



8.4.4 VLAN Setting (802.1Q Mode)
Procedure 8-8
3. In the VLAN Setting tabbed page, click a port number (listed under the Port)
to register VLAN settings.
Figure 8-32 VLAN Setting Window — VLAN Setting Tab
VLAN Setting tab Port Numbers (see
NOTE: When in the MPLS-TP mode, the column next to this column shows MPLS-
TP Port Mode.

4. VLAN Setting option window appears. From the Port Type drop-down list,
select a Port Type, Access, Tunnel or Trunk, and specify the required
parameters according to the selected port type:
Figure 8-33 VLAN Setting Option Window
Port Type drop-down list
NOTE: For MODEM, Trunk is the only choice to select.

 Port Type: Access

Figure 8-34 VLAN Setting Option Window — Access
 Click a radio button of the target VLAN ID under the Untag Frame Assignment
(Access Port) for an access port.
 The untagged frames pass through the ports selected here.
 Incoming tagged frames, except for those with matching VLAN IDs, are
discarded at the ports selected here.

 Port Type: Tunnel

Figure 8-35 VLAN Setting Option Window — Tunnel
NOTE: In the MPLS-TP mode, a port whose Port Type is assigned to the Tunnel
cannot be used for the Managed VLAN.
 Tick the check box of the VLAN that is to configure the port type: Tunnel.
 At the ports selected here, any frame types, either untagged or tagged with any
VLAN ID, are unconditionally tagged (Outer tag) with the VLAN ID, which is
checked in the list.
 When the port is configured as Tunnel, all the check boxes in L2CP Transparency
windows are enabled.

 Port Type: Trunk

Figure 8-36 VLAN Setting Option Window — Trunk
 Tick the check boxes of the VLANs that are to configure the port type: Trunk.
 At the ports selected here, tagged frames with the VLAN IDs that are checked in
the list are allowed to pass through.
 An untagged frame will be assigned with the VLAN ID of the selected VLAN in
Untag Frame Assignment column.
 Other types of frames are discarded.

Table 8-6 VLAN Setting Parameters
Port/VLAN Configuration (read only) Indicates the information of selected port.
VLAN Assignment
VLAN Mode 802.1Q Indicates the VLAN Mode of the selected port.
Port Type Access Allows untagged frames and tagged frames with matching
VLAN IDs to pass through.
Tunnel Allows both untagged and tagged frames to pass through.
Trunk Allows the selected tagged and untagged frames to pass

through. An untagged frame will be assigned with the
specified VLAN ID.
X VLAN Assignment Clear (button) Clicking here removes ticks from all check boxes.
Enable (check box) Tick the check box to select a VLAN to assign the selected
port type configuration.
Untag Frame Assignment (radio button) Clicking the radio button assigns a VLAN ID to the untagged
(Access Port) frame.
Swap Enable (check box) Tick the check box to enable the swap mode on the selected
VLAN, which enables the External Used VLAN filed below.
External Used VLAN (see below) Specifies VLAN ID to swap to. See Figure 8-37 below. In the
MPLS-TP mode, the VLAN ID that is used by PW setting
cannot be selected.
Figure 8-37 Set External VLAN to Swap to
➀ ➁
➂
➀ Tick a check box to enable External Used VLAN.

➁ Click the link.
➂ Enter the VLAN ID. [VLAN IDs of PW specified ➃
UNI (VLAN-Based) ports are not listed.]
➃ Click OK button.

5. When completed, click the OK button of the VLAN Setting option window.
Figure 8-38 VLAN Setting Option Window (Trunk)

The VLAN Setting window returns.

8.4.5 VLAN Setting (802.1ad Mode)
NOTE: For the system where the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, 802.1ad
mode is currently not available.
Procedure 8-9
3. In the VLAN Setting tabbed page, click a port number (listed under the Port)
to register VLAN settings.
VLAN Setting tab (see NOTE:)

Port Numbers
NOTE: When the MPLS-TP mode, the column next to this column should be MPLS-
TP Port Mode.
VLAN Setting option window appears.

4. Select a Port Type, and specify the required parameters according to the
selected port type:
Port Type
NOTES:
1. When the target port is MODEM Port, S-Trunk is the only choice to
select.
2. (For MPLS-TP Mode): C-Bridge is not available if the MPLS-TP Port Mode
is either NNI (Port Based) or UNI (Port Based).
3. (For MPLS-TP Mode): Port Type cannot be selected if the MPLS-TP Port
Mode is UNI (VLAN Based) where the LSP or PW is already specified to
the target VLAN.

 Port Type: C-Access

Figure 8-42 VLAN Setting Option Window — C-Access
 The untagged frames pass through the ports selected here.

 Incoming tagged frames, except for those that the outer tag is C-Tag, and that the
S-VLAN ID matches, are discarded at the ports selected here.
Table 8-7 VLAN Setting Parameters — C-Access
VLAN Assignment
VLAN Mode 802.1ad Indicates the VLAN Mode of the selected port.
Port Type C-Access Allows untagged frames, C-Tagged frames and frames with
matching S-VLAN ID to pass through.
Enable —— (This option is disabled.)
C-Frame Assignment (radio button) Clicking the radio button selects a VLAN ID to the untagged
(C-Access Port) frame.
C-VLAN ID ——— ———

 Port Type: S-Trunk

Figure 8-43 VLAN Setting Option Window — S-Trunk
 Tick the check boxes of the VLANs that are to configure the port type: S-Trunk.
 At the ports selected here,
– Tagged frames with S-VLAN ID that are checked in the list are forwarded.
– For untagged frames, S-VLAN of the selected VLAN in the Untag Frame
Assignment column will be assigned, then be forwarded.
– Other types of frames are discarded.
Table 8-8 VLAN Setting Parameters — S-Trunk
VLAN Assignment
Port Type S-Trunk Allows selected tagged frames and untagged frames to pass
through. For an untagged frame, the specified S-VLAN ID is
applied.
Enable (check box) Tick the check box to select a VLAN to assign the selected
port type configuration.
C-VLAN ID ——— ———

 Port Type: C-Bridge

Figure 8-44 VLAN Setting Option Window — C-Bridge
click
 Tick the check boxes of the VLANs that are to configure the port type: C-Bridge.
 At the ports selected here, tagged frames with S-VLAN ID that are checked in the
list will be allowed to pass through.
 The C-Tagged frames will be assigned with an S-VLAN ID of the selected
VLAN in C-Tag Frame Assignment column.
 The other frames will be discarded.
Figure 8-45 Modify C-VLAN ID Option Window
i) To enter the C-VLAN ID, click the

Undefined link under the C-VLAN ID.
The C-VLAN ID option window
appears.
ii) Enter the ID or the appropriate value.
iii) Click the OK button. The VLAN Setting

option window updates the C-VLAN ID
Information.

Table 8-9 VLAN Setting Parameters — C-Bridge (1 of 2)
VLAN Assignment
Port Type C-Bridge  Allows the selected tagged frames to pass through.
Untagged frames are discarded. For an outer tag with
matching C-VLAN ID, S-Tag corresponding to the C-Tag will
be applied, then pass through.
 In the MPLS-TP mode, when the MPLS-TP Port Mode is
NNI/UNI (Port-Based), C-Bridge cannot be selected.
 In the MPLS-TP mode, when the MPLS-TP Port Mode is Uni
(VLAN-Based) and either LSP or PW is already specified to
the target VLAN, C-Bridge cannot be selected
X VLAN Assignment Clear —— Removes (a) tick(s) in check box(es) below (cancels
selections).
Enable (check box) Tick the check box to select a VLAN to assign the selected port
type configuration.

Table 8-9 VLAN Setting Parameters — C-Bridge (2 of 2)
C-VLAN ID Undefined Indicates the specified values.
1 to 40

information.

8.5 FDB Setting
8.5.1 FDB Setting (for Equipment)
Procedure 8-10
Function Setting to select FDB Setting. The FDB Setting window appears.
3. In the FDB Setting tabbed page, click the Equipment link.

Figure 8-49 FDB Setting — FDB Setting Tab
Equipment link
FDB Setting (Equipment) option window appears.


Figure 8-50 FDB Setting (Equipment) Option Window
Table 8-10 FDB Setting Parameters
Learning MAX Size 0 to 32384 Specify the maximum size of the learning MAC
Address entries.
Specifying 0 disables the Learning option.
Learning Limit Mode Forwarding If the incoming frame that is from a new MAC
Address exceeds the maximum size of FDB, the
frame without learning this source MAC Address will
be forwarded.
Discard If the incoming frame that is from a new MAC

Address discarded.
Learning Limit Trap Enable Enables the equipment to send a trap if the Learning
MAC Address reaches the specified MAX size.
Disable Disables the action above.

The FDB Setting window updates the information.


Figure 8-52 FDB Setting Window — FDB Setting Tab

8.5.2 FDB Setting (VLAN ID)
8.5.2.1 Service Tab
Procedure 8-11
3. In the FDB Setting tabbed page, select Service tab, then click on the desired
VLAN ID number to configure.
Service tab VLAN ID
FDB Setting option window appears.

4. Specify the maximum size and mode for learning MAC Address:
Figure 8-54 FDB Setting Option Window
Table 8-11 FDB Setting (VLAN ID) Parameters
Address entries.
frame without learning this source MAC Address
will be forwarded.

Address discarded.




8.5.2.2 Port Tab
When in the MPLS-TP Mode, following should be considered:

 This option is available only when the MPLS-TP Port Mode selects UNI
(VLAN-Based). NNI/UNI (Port-Based) mode cannot specify the FDB Port
function.)
 Settings here will be automatically initialized if the MPLS-TP Port Mode is
modified between Port-Based to/from VLAN-Based.
Procedure 8-12
3. In the FDB Setting tabbed page, select Port tab, then click on the desired
Port number to configure.
(see NOTE:)
Port tab Port Number
NOTE: When in the MPLS-TP mode, this column shows the MPLS-TP Port Mode.
FDB Setting option window appears.

4. Specify the maximum size and mode for learning MAC Address:
Figure 8-58 FDB Setting Option Window
Table 8-12 FDB Setting (VLAN ID) Parameters
Address entries.
frame without learning this source MAC Address
will be forwarded.

Address discarded.




8.5.3 Static Entry Setting

(VLAN-Based). NNI/UNI (Port-Based) mode cannot specify the FDB Static
Entry function.)
 Settings here will be automatically initialized if the MPLS-TP Port Mode is
modified.
8.5.3.1 Add Static Entry
Procedure 8-13
3. In the Static Entry tabbed page, click the Add tool button.
Figure 8-61 FDD Setting Window — Static Entry Tab
Add tool button
Static Entry (Add) option window appears.

4. Specify the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 8-62 Static Entry (Add) Option Window
Table 8-13 FDB Setting (Static Entry) Parameters
Item (Available Card) Names of available (registered) cards are

shown in the drop-down list. Select the
target card.
Port (Available Port) Available (registered) ports are shown in

the drop-down list. Select the target port.
MAC Address xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx Enter the object MAC Address.
Enable (radio button) Tick the check box to assign the port to
the specified VLAN.



Figure 8-64 FDB Setting Window — Static Entry Tab

8.5.3.2 Modify Static Entry
MAC Address of the registered Static Entry can be modified.
Procedure 8-14
3. Select the Static Entry tab, then click the Entry No. of the target to modify.
Entry No.
Static Entry (Static Entry No. xxx) option window for the selected object
appears.

4. Edit the MAC Address, then click the OK button.

Figure 8-66 Static Entry Option Window

6. The FDB Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.

8.5.3.3 Delete Static Entry
Procedure 8-15
3. Select the Static Entry tab, then click the Delete tool button.
Figure 8-69 Static Entry Setting Window
Delete tool button
Static Entry (Delete) option window for the selected object appears.

4. Tick the check box of the target object, then click the OK button. Ticking the
check box on the title bar selects all.
Figure 8-70 Static Entry Option Window
clicking to leave a tick in this box selects all





8.6 ETH OAM Setting
 OAM: Operation, Administration & Maintenance
 MEG: Maintenance Entity Group
 MEP: MEG End Point
 MIP: MEG Intermediate Point
 This option is available unless the MPLS-TP Port Mode is NNI.
 Settings here will be automatically initialized if the MPLS-TP Port Mode of the
target port is modified.

8.6.1 OAM MEG Tab
8.6.1.1 Add MEG Index
Procedure 8-16
Function Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window
appears.
3. In the OAM MEG tabbed page, click the Add MEG tool button.
Figure 8-74 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MEG Tab
Add MEG tool button

OAM MEG tab
OAM MEG Setting (Add) option window appears.


Figure 8-75 OAM MEG Setting (Add) Option Window
Table 8-14 OAM MEG Setting Parameters
MEG Index 1 to 128 Set MEG Index number.
Maintenance Domain Name (text field) Maximum length in total of Maintenance Domain
Name and Short MA Name is 43 characters long.
Short MA Name (text field)
MEG Level 0 to 7 Specify the MEG level.
CCM Enable Enable/Disable to output/monitor CCM. Selecting

Enable here requires the settings of ETH-CC Period
Disable and CCM Priority settings below.
ETH-CC Period 3.3 [ms] Set the period of ETH-CC (Continuity Check)
Message.
10 [ms]
100 [ms]
1 [s]
10 [s]
60 [s]
CCM Priority 0 to 7 Specify the priority of the CCM

BNM Enable Enable/Disable to output the ITU-T G.8013/Y1731

Ethernet Bandwidth Notification Message (BNM) to
Disable the designated Client MEP (Destination Server).
Selecting Enable here requires
BNM Server MEP (available MODEMs, Specify the MODEM Port Mapping for the BNM
SWGs and Radio GRPs) function.
ETH-BN Period 1 [s] Specify the period to output the BNM. [unit: second]
10 [s]
60 [s]
BNM Priority 0 to 7 Specify the priority level of BNM Frames
BNM Hold Time 0 [s] to 60 [s] Specify the Hold Time. [unit: second; at the second
intervals]

The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.


Figure 8-77 ETH ADM Setting Window — OAM MEG Tab (1/2: on the left)
Figure 8-78 ETH ADM Setting Window — OAM MEG Tab (2/2: rightmost field)

8.6.1.2 Modify MEG Index
Procedure 8-17
appears.
3. In the OAM MEG tabbed page, click the MEG Index number.
click MEG Index

OAM MEG tab


Figure 8-80 OAM MEG Setting (Modify) Option Window
Table 8-15 OAM MEG Setting (Modify) Parameters (1 of 2)
CCM Enable Enable to output/monitor CCM.
Disable Disable to output/monitor CCM.
ETH-CC Period 3.3 [ms] Set the period of ETH-CC (Continuity Check)
Message.
10 [ms]
100 [ms]
1 [s]
10 [s]
60 [s]
CCM Priority 0 to 7 Specify the priority of the CCM
BNM Enable Enable/Disable to send the Bandwidth Notification

Message (BNM) to the Client MEP (Destination
Disable Server). Selecting Enable here requires
BNM Server MEP (available Specify the MODEM Port Mapping for the BNM
MODEMs, function.
SWGs and
Radio GRPs)

Table 8-15 OAM MEG Setting (Modify) Parameters (2 of 2)
ETH-BN Period 1 [s] Specify the period to output the BNM. [unit: second]
10 [s]
60 [s]
BNM Priority 0 to 7 Specify the priority level of BNM Frames
BNM Hold Time 0 [s] to 60 [s] Specify the Hold Time. [unit: second; at the second
intervals]



Figure 8-82 ETH ADM Setting Window — OAM MEG Tab (1/2: on the left)
Figure 8-83 ETH ADM Setting Window — OAM MEG Tab (2/2: to the rightmost)

8.6.1.3 Delete MEG Index
Procedure 8-18
appears.
3. Select the OAM MEG tab, then click the Delete MEG tool button.
Delete MEG tool button
OAM MEG Setting (Delete) option window appears.

4. Enter the MEG Index number of the target to be removed, then click the OK
button.
Figure 8-85 OAM MEG Setting (Delete) Option Window



7. Confirm that the target OAM MEG has been removed.

Figure 8-88 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MEG Tab (1/2: on the left)
Figure 8-89 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MEG Tab (2/2: to the rightmost)

8.6.2 OAM MEP Tab
8.6.2.1 Add MEP Index
Procedure 8-19
appears.
3. In the OAM MEP tabbed page, click the Add MEP button.
Figure 8-90 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MEP Tab
Add Index tool button
OAM MEP Setting (Add) option window appears.

4. Add Peer MEP ID first:

Figure 8-91 OAM MEP Setting (Add) Option Window
i) Enable radio buttons ii) Add Peer MEP button
i) From the list in the MEG Configuration option box, click the Enable radio
button of the target to select.
ii) Click Add Peer MEP button in the Peer MEP Configuration option box. The
Peer MEP Add option window appears.
iii) Enter the Peer MEP ID to add.

Figure 8-92 Peer MEP Add Option Box

Table 8-16 Peer MEP Add Option Parameters
Peer MEP ID 1 to 8191 Assign MEP ID of the peer equipment
iv) Click the OK button. The Peer MEP Configuration option box updates the
entries.
5. Specify the remaining parameters in the OAM MEP Setting (Add) option
window:

Table 8-17 OAM MEP Setting (Add) Parameters
MEP Configuration
MEP Index 1 to 128 Specify a local MEP Index number.
MEP ID 1 to 8191 Specify an ID to the MEG Index.
Item (Available Card) Select the target card.
Port (Available Port) Select a port.
Direction Up MEP Specifies the direction of service from Line to L2SW

(Up MEP) or from L2SW to Line (Down MEP).
Down MEP
 When in the MPLS-TP mode whose MPLS-TP Port
Mode is UNI (Port-Based), Up MEP is the only
available choice.
 When in the MPLS-TP mode whose MPLS-TP Port
Mode is UNI (VLAN-Based), either Up MEP or
Down MEP is available to choose.
 When the BNM is enabled, this option is fixed to
Down MEP.
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an Ethernet OAM Message with a

VLAN.
MEG Configuration
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an MEP with an MEG Configuration.
Peer MEP Configuration
Add Peer MEP (button) Click to open the Peer MEP Add option window.
Enable / Peer MEP ID (check box, list) This field lists the Peer MEP ID(s) registered by MEG
Configuration.
6. When completed, click the OK button. Confirmation dialog box appears.



9. The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information. Confirm that the newly
added MEP Index information is displayed.
Figure 8-96 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MEP Tab (1/2: on the left)
Figure 8-97 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MEP Tab (2/2: rightmost field)

8.6.2.2 Modify MEP Index
NOTE: Under the following conditions, the MEP Index cannot be modified:
 MEP ID is modified to the value that is currently registered to Peer MEP ID.
 Peer MEP ID is modified to the value that is currently registered to MEP ID.
When the modifications such as ones above are needed, delete the MEP
Index that contains the target ID, then newly register the MEP Index with the
desired values.
Procedure 8-20
appears.
3. In the OAM MEP tabbed page, click the MEP Index number of the target to be
modified.
MEP Index
OAM MEP Setting (Modify) option window appears.

4. Modify the parameters:

Figure 8-99 OAM MEP Setting (Modify) Option Window
Table 8-18 OAM MEP Setting (Add) Parameters (1 of 2)
MEP Configuration

Table 8-18 OAM MEP Setting (Add) Parameters (2 of 2)
Direction Up MEP Specifies the direction of service from Line to L2SW (Up
MEP) or from L2SW to Line (Down MEP).
Down MEP
 When in the MPLS-TP mode whose MPLS-TP Port Mode
is UNI (Port-Based), Up MEP is the only available choice.
 When in the MPLS-TP mode whose MPLS-TP Port Mode
is UNI (VLAN-Based), either Up MEP or Down MEP is
available to choose.
 When the BNM is enabled, this option is fixed to Down
MEP.
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an Ethernet OAM Message with a VLAN.
MEG Configuration
Configuration.



8. Confirm that the modified parameter(s) is/are displayed.

Figure 8-103 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MEP Tab (2/2: to the rightmost)

8.6.2.3 Delete MEP Index
Procedure 8-21
appears.
3. In the OAM MEP tabbed page, click the Delete MEP button of the target to be
removed.
Delete MEP button
OAM MEP Setting (Delete) option window appears.

4. Select an MEP Index number of the target to be removed.

Figure 8-105 OAM MEP Setting (Delete) Option Window



8. Confirm that the target OAM MEP Index has been removed.
Figure 8-109 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MEP Tab (2/2: to the rightmost)

8.6.3 OAM MIP Tab
NOTE: This option is available only on ports whose MPLS-TP Port Mode is UNI
(VLAN-Based) where the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP.
8.6.3.1 Add MIP Index
Procedure 8-22
appears.
3. In the OAM MIP tabbed page, click the Add MIP tool button.
Figure 8-110 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MIP Tab
OAM MIP tab

Add MIP tool button
OAM MIP Setting (Add) option window appears.


Figure 8-111 OAM MIP Setting (Add) Option Window
Table 8-19 OAM MIP Index Parameter
MIP Configuration
MIP Index 1 to 32 Specify an MIP Index number.
MEG Level 0 to 7 Specify an MG Level to the MIP.
(Data retrieved by MIP Configuration)
Enable (check box) Tick (click to leave a tick in) a check box to associate
an MEP with a VLAN.
When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. ETH OAM Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.

8.6.3.2 Modify MIP Index
Procedure 8-23 Modify OAM MIP Index
appears.
3. In the OAM MIP tabbed page, click on the MIP Index number of the target.
OAM MIP tab

MIP Index
OAM MIP Setting (Modify) option window appears.

4. Modify the parameter(s):

Figure 8-115 OAM MIP Setting (Modify) Option Window
MIP Configuration
MEG Level 0 to 7 Specify an MEG Level to the MIP.
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an MEP with a VLAN.


7. The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information. Confirm that the
information of modified parameter(s) is displayed.

8.6.3.3 Delete MIP Index
Procedure 8-24
appears.
3. In the OAM MIP tabbed page, click on the Delete MIP tool button.
OAM MIP tab

Delete MIP tool button
4. OAM MIP Setting (Delete) option window appears. Select the MIP Index
number of the target, then click the OK button.
Figure 8-119 OAM MIP Setting (Delete) Option Window



7. The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information. Confirm that the target
OAM MIP Index has been removed.

8.6.4 LINK OAM Setting
Following procedure enables the Link OAM function:
Procedure 8-25
Function Setting to select ETH OAM Setting.
3. The ETH OAM Setting window appears. In the Link OAM tabbed page, click
the port number of the target.
Figure 8-123 ETH OAM Setting Window — Link OAM Tab
Link OAM Tab (see NOTE:)

Port numbers
NOTE: When in the MPLS-TP mode, the column next to this column should be
MPLS-TP Port Mode.
Link OAM Setting option window appears.

4. Specify the parameters:

Figure 8-124 Link OAM Setting Option Window
Table 8-21 Link OAM Setting Parameter
Local DTE Information

Item (read only) Indicates the information of the selected object.
Slot (read only)
Port (read only)
Port Name (read only)
Link OAM Enable Enable/Disable the use of Link OAM function.
Disable
Link OAM Mode Active Uses active Link OAM (indicates the discovery process).
Passive Uses passive Link OAM (does not initiates discovery process).
Dying Gasp Enable Enable/Disable to issue Dying Gasp notification.
Disable
Critical Event Enable Enable/Disable to issue Critical Event notification.
Disable

Table 8-21 Link OAM Setting Parameter
Remote DTE Information
Unidirectional (read only) Indicates the DTE information of the destination equipment.
Remote Loopback (read only)
Link Event (read only)
MAC Address (read only)

7. The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.
Figure 8-126 ETH OAM Setting Window — Link OAM Tab

8.7 RSTP/MSTP Setting

 STP: Spanning Tree Protocol
 RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
 MSTP: Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
NOTES:
1. STP/RSTP Tunnel function cannot be enabled on a port if it enables RSTP.
2. When in the MPLS-TP Mode, following should be considered:

(VLAN-Based). NNI/UNI (Port-Based) mode cannot specify RSTP/MSTP.
 If either LSP or PW is specified to the target port, this option is not available
either.
8.7.1 Select STP Mode for Setting Procedure
The setting windows for RSTP Mode and MSTP Mode differ. Select the appropriate
window for the mode using the following steps before starting the setting procedures.
Procedure 8-26
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then ts submenu ETH
Function Setting to select RSTP/MSTP Setting.
The RSTP/MSTP Setting window appears.

3. Click Modify STP Mode button.

Figure 8-127 RSTP / MSTP Setting Window
Modify STP Mode button
4. The STP Mode Setting option window appears. Select RSTP or MSTP from the
STP Mode drop-down list.
Figure 8-128 STP Mode Setting Option Window

RSTP / MSTP Setting window of the selected mode appears:

Figure 8-130 RSTP / MSTP Setting Window (example: for RSTP Mode)
(see NOTE:)
Indicates selected mode.
NOTE: In the MPLS-TP mode, the column next to this column shows MPLS-TP Port
Mode.

8.7.2 RSTP Port
8.7.2.1 Modify RSTP Port
Procedure 8-27
Function Setting to select RSTP/MSTP Setting. The RSTP/MSTP Setting
window appears.
3. Check if the indicating mode is RSTP, then click Modify STP Port tool button.
 If the indicated STP Mode is not RSTP, change the mode using procedure in
8.7.1 Select STP Mode for Setting Procedure.
Figure 8-131 RSTP / MSTP Setting Window (for RSTP Mode)
Indicates RSTP
Modify STP Port tool button
The STP Port Setting option window (for RSTP mode) appears.


Figure 8-132 RSTP Port Setting Option Window
(see NOTE:)
TP Port Mode.

Table 8-22 RSTP Port Setting Parameter
Enable (check box) Tick the check box to select the target object.
In the MPLS-TP mode, if either LSP or PW is specified
to the target port, this check box cannot be ticked.
(RSTP/MSTP cannot share the port with MPLS-TP
traffic.)
Item (read only) Shows the information regarding the available cards.
Slot (read only)
Port (read only)
Port Name / LAG Name (read only
STP Port Path Cost Auto Enables the function to automatically calculate the
path costs.
Manual Selects to manually calculate and enter the path costs.
STP Port Path Cost 1 to 200000000 This filed is enabled by setting STP Port Path Cost to
(Value) Manual. Enter the cost manually.
STP Port Priority 0 to 240 Specifies the STP Port Priority. [granularity: 16]
Edge Port Enable Sets the target port to Edge Port.
Disable Removes the Edge Port setting from the target port.

The RSTP / MSTP Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed parameters:

Figure 8-134 RSTP Setting Window
(see NOTE:)
TP Port Mode.

8.7.2.2 Modify Detailed RSTP Parameter
Procedure 8-28
Function Setting to select RSTP / MSTP Setting. The RSTP / MSTP Setting
window appears.
3. Check if the indicating mode is RSTP, then click Modify Detail STP Parameter
tool button.
 If the indicated STP Mode is not RSTP, change the mode using procedure in
Figure 8-135 RSTP / MSTP Setting Window (for RSTP Mode)
(see NOTE:)
Indicates RSTP
Modify Detail STP Parameter
tool button
TP Port Mode.
The Detail STP Parameter Setting option window appears.


Figure 8-136 Detail STP Parameter Setting Option Window
Table 8-23 Detail RSTP Parameter Setting
Bridge Priority (RSTP) 0 to 61440 Sets STP Priority of the bridge. [granularity: 4096]
STP Bridge MAX Age 6 to 40 Sets the period to store the BPDU Configuration.
Bridge acknowledges that a topology change has
occurred when the MAX Age passes putting the
BPDU aged out. [unit: second]
STP Bridge Hello Time 1 Sets the period for sending the BPDU Configuration
from Root Bridge. [unit: second]
2
STP Bridge Forward Delay 4 to 30 Sets the delay period to execute the change from the
Listening Port to Learning Port.
 The value of this option should be greater than that
of the STP Bridge MAX Age.
[unit: second]
STP TX Hold Count 1 to 10 Sets the number of BPDUs that can be sent per
second.


7. Verify the displayed information:

Figure 8-138 RSTP Setting Window
Updated Information
(see NOTE:)
NOTE: When in the MPLS-TP mode, he column next to this column shows MPLS-
TP Port Mode.

8.7.3 MSTP Port
8.7.3.1 Modify MSTP Port
NOTES:
1. MSTP and ERP do not operate simultaneously on the same system. (To
enable MSTP, ERP should be disabled.)
2. All VLANs belong to IST by default.

3. In the IEEE 802.1ad mode, MSTP operation is disabled on ports that are
assigned to C-Access or C-Bridge.
4. Default values for Timers and Hops are recommended to use. [Default
values for timers are compliant with the recommendations.]
5. VLANs that are assigned to instances and that are to ports are not
interdependent. VLANs should be assigned to all ports that are associated
with the MSTP equipment. If not, signals may not be transmitted through the
path though it is concluded by the protocol.
Procedure 8-29
Function Setting to select RSTP/MSTP Setting.
The RSTP/MSTP Setting window appears.

3. Check if the indicating mode is MSTP, then click Modify STP Port tool button.
 If the indicated STP Mode is not MSTP, change the mode using procedure in
Figure 8-139 RSTP / MSTP Setting Window (for MSTP Mode)
Indicates MSTP
Modify STP Port tool button
The STP Port Setting option window appears.


Figure 8-140 MSTP Port Setting Option Window (Selecting IST Tab)

Figure 8-141 MSTP Port Setting Option Window (Selecting MSTI Tab)
(example: MSTI1)
(see NOTE:)
TP Port Mode.

Table 8-24 MSTP Port Setting Parameter (1 of 2)
STP Mode: MSTP Indicates MSTP.
Region Name (text field) Enter the Region Name. Valid value is 1 to 32
characters long.
Revision No. 0 to 65535 Specify the Revision Number.
BPDU Guard Timer Usage Use Select to use or not to use the BPDU. Selecting Use
enables BPDU Guard Timer option below.
Not Use
BPDU Guard Timer 10 to 1000000 Set BPDU Guard Timer. [unit: second]
IST tab
CIST Regional Root (read only) Indicates the CIST Regional Root Bridge Priority and
Bridge Priority / ID ID of the selected port.
Bridge Priority 0 to 61440 Select a Bridge Priority. [granularity: 4096]
Member VLAN (read only) Indicates the member VLAN IDs of the selected port.
Slot (read only)
Port (read only)
Port Name /LAG Name (read only
path costs.
Manual Selects to manually calculate and enter the path

costs.
STP Port Path Cost 1 to 200000000 This filed is enabled by setting STP Port Path Cost
(Value) to Manual. Enter the cost manually.
STP Port Priority 0 to 240 Specifies the STP Port Priority.
Edge Port Enable Sets the target port to Edge Port.
Disable Removes the Edge Port setting from the target port.
BPDU Guard Enable Enables/Disables the BPDU Guard usage.
Disable
Root Guard Enable Enables/Disables the Root Guard usage.
Disable

Table 8-24 MSTP Port Setting Parameter (2 of 2)
MSTI1, MSTI2, MSTI3, MSTI4 tabs
MSTI1 - MSTI4 Enable Enables/Disables the usage of selected MSTI

(options below).)
Disable
MSTI Regional Root (read only) Indicates the Regional Root Bridge Priority and ID of
Bridge Priority / ID the selected port.
Instance No. 1 to 4093 Enter the number to select the instance.
Bridge Priority (MSTI) 0 to 61440 Select a Bridge Priority. [granularity: 4096]
Member VLAN (read only) Indicates the member VLAN IDs of the selected port.
In the MPLS-TP mode, if either LSP or PW is
specified to the target port, this check box cannot be
ticked. (RSTP/MSTP cannot share the port with
MPLS-TP traffic.)
Slot (read only)
Port (read only)
Port Name / LAG Name (read only
path costs.
Manual Selects to manually calculate and enter the path

costs.
STP Port Path Cost 1 to 200000000 This filed is enabled by setting STP Port Path Cost
(Value) to Manual. Enter the cost manually.
STP Port Priority 0 to 240 Specifies the STP Port Priority.

[0, 16, 32, 48, 66, 80,
96, 112, 128, 144, 160,
176, 192, 208, 224, 240]


7. Verify the displayed parameters:

Figure 8-143 MSTP Setting Window (IST Tab)
Figure 8-144 MSTP Setting Window (MSTI Tab)
(see NOTE:)
TP Port Mode.

8.7.3.2 Modify Detail MSTP Parameter
Procedure 8-30
Function Setting to select RSTP/MSTP Setting. The RSTP/MSTP Setting
window appears.
3. Check if the indicating mode is MSTP, then click Modify Detail STP Parameter
button.
 If the indicated STP Mode is not MSTP, change the mode using procedure in
Figure 8-145 RSTP / MSTP Setting Window (for MSTP Mode)
Indicates MSTP
Modify Detail STP Parameter tool button
The Detailed STP Parameter Setting option window appears.


Figure 8-146 Detail STP Parameter Setting Option Window
Table 8-25 Detail STP Parameter Setting
STP Bridge MAX Age 6 to 40 Sets the period to store the BPDU Configuration.
Bridge acknowledges that a topology change has
occurred when the MAX Age passes putting the
BPDU aged out. [unit: second]
STP Bridge Hello Time 2 A period for sending the BPDU Configuration from
Root Bridge. The value is fixed to 2 seconds.
STP Bridge Forward Delay 4 to 30 Sets the delay period to execute the change from the
Listening Port to Learning Port.
 The value of this option should be greater than a
half of the STP Bridge MAX Age values minus 1.
[unit: second]
STP TX Hold Count 1 to 10 Sets the number of BPDUs that can be sent per
second.
STP MAX Hop Count 1 to 40 Specifies hop counts.


7. Verify the displayed information:

Figure 8-148 MSTP Setting Window
Updated Information

8.8 ERP Setting

NOTES:
1. ERP (ETH-Ring Protection) and MSTP cannot be enabled simultaneously.

(To enable ERP, MSTP should be disabled.)
2. ETH-Ring Protection can be configured by the Ethernet Ports whose VLAN
Port Type is the Trunk (802.1Q) or S-Trunk (802.1ad).
3. When in the MPLS-TP Mode, following should be considered:
(VLAN-Based). NNI/UNI (Port-Based) mode cannot specify the ERP.)
 If either LSP or PW is specified to the target port, this option is not available
either.
8.8.1 Configure ERP
Procedure 8-31
Function Setting to select ERP Setting.
3. The ERP Setting window appears. Click the Modify ERP Mode tool button.
Figure 8-149 ERP Setting Window
Modify ERP Mode tool button
ERP Mode Setting option window appears.

4. Select Enable by clicking its radio button, then click the OK button.
Figure 8-150 ERP Mode Setting Option Window

6. The ERP Setting window enables the Add ERP tool button. Click the Add
ERP tool button.
indicates Enable
Add ERP tool button
Step 1 ERP Setting option window appears.

7. Set the appropriate values:

Figure 8-153 Step 1 ERP Setting Window
Table 8-26 Step 1 ERP Setting Parameters (1 of 2)
Ring ID 01 to 16 Assign the ID number of the Ring.
Ring Name (text field) Enter the Ring name to apply. Valid value is 1 to 32 characters long.
Ring Type Major Ring Select a ring type that differs
Sub-Ring See Figure 8-154 Definition of Ring Types for reference to select a
valid ring-type.
Upper Ring 01 to 16 Specify an ID of Upper Ring to which the Sub-Ring connects. This
ID option is enabled when the Ring Type is Sub-Ring (Interconnection
Node). Assignment with Ring Port0 must be unique in the Sub-
Ring.

Table 8-26 Step 1 ERP Setting Parameters (2 of 2)
Ring Port 0
Item (Available Cards) Specify an interconnecting port.
Port (Available Ports) An assignment to the same Sub-Ring using the same port can be
made one time only. (No multi-instance Sub-Ring.)
Port Name (read only) In the MPLS-TP Mode, a port whose MPLS-TP Port mode is set to
NNI/UNI (Port-Base), cannot configure the ERP,
In the MPLS-TP mode, if either LSP or PW is specified to the target
port, the port cannot configure the ERP.
Ring Port 1 [This option is not editable for a Sub-Ring (Interconnection Node).]
Item (Available Cards) Select a Card.
Port (Available Ports) Specify the port.
Port Name (read only) Indicates the selected port’s name.
RPL Owner Enable The RPL Owner node is an ETH Ring node adjacent to the RPL that
is responsible for blocking its end of the RPL under normal
Disable conditions. Only one RPL Owner node should exist in the Ring.
RPL Port Port0 Specify the RPL Port. This option is enabled when the RPL Owner
setting is enabled.
Port1
Revertive Revertive Revertive mode switches the Active port back to the original port
Mode when recovered. Non Revertive mode does not. This option is
Non Revertive enabled when the RPL Owner setting is enabled.
WTR Timer 1 [min] to 12 [min] A period to wait before restoring back when the system recovered
from the failure. This option is enabled when the RPL Owner setting
is enabled. [default: 5 min]
Guard Time 10 to 2000 [ms] The Guard Timer is active whenever an ETH Ring node receives an
indication that a local switching request has cleared. [unit:
millisecond; default: 500 ms]
Virtual Enable Enable or Disable the usage of Virtual Channels within the Sub-
Channel Ring. The value of this option must be the same at all nodes that
Disable configure the Sub-Ring or Sub-Ring (Interconnection Node).
Flush Event Enable This option is available for a Sub-Ring (Interconnection Node)
only. Enabling this option allows the Major Ring to carry out the FDB
Disable Flush if any event causing a ring switch occurs within the Sub-Ring.
This option must be enabled in the configuration by the specific
topologies as shown in <Arial_9XRi>Figure 8-155, however, it is
recommended to enable the option anyway unless any strong
reason to disable the option exists.

Figure 8-154 Definition of Ring Types
Major Ring
Ring ID = 1 Sub-Ring 1
Ring ID = 2
Sub-Ring 2
Ring ID = 3
Major Ring
Sub-Ring
Sub-Ring
Sub-Ring (Interconnection Node)
Upper Ring ID = 1
Sub-Ring (Interconnection Node)
Upper Ring ID = 1
Figure 8-155 Specific Topologies Requiring FDB Flush
Topologies that Must Enable Flush Event Option:
i) A failure that causes a ring switch occurs within the Sub-Ring, where the Major
Ring has a blockage on the link shared with the Sub-Ring.
Major Ring Sub-Ring
FDB Flush Required
ii) A failure that causes a ring switch occurs within the Sub-Ring, where (a)
Node(s) exist(s) on the shared link.
FDB Flush Required
Major Ring Sub-Ring
8. When completed, click the Next button. Step 2 ERP VLAN Setting option
window appears.

9. Assign the appropriate values, then click the Next button:

Figure 8-156 Step 2 ERP VLAN Setting Option Window
Table 8-27 Step 2 ERP VLAN Setting Parameters
Control VLAN ID 1 to 4094 A VLAN ID is used for R-APS transmission. Control VLAN ID
for each Ring must be unique. To use Virtual Channels within
the Sub-Ring, this Control VLAN ID must be registered for
the Traffic VLAN ID of the Upper Ring.
Control MAC Address 01 to FF Specify the last two digits of the address.
R-APS Message Priority 0 to 7 VLAN CoS field of R-APS frame. [default: 7]
R-APS Message MEG Level 0 to 7 MEG level of R-APS message. [default: 7]
Traffic VLAN ID
Enable (check box) Tick the check box to enable the use of Traffic VLAN ID

10. Step 3 ERP LOC Detection MEP Index Setting option window appears. Assign
the appropriate values, then click the Next button.
Figure 8-157 Step 3 ERP LOC Detection MEP Index Setting Option Window
Table 8-28 Step 3 ERP LOC Detection MEP Index Setting Parameters
LOC Detection Enable Enables to detect failures for switching the Ring using
ETH-CC. To carry out the switching under 50 ms, this
setting is required with 3.3 ms ETH-CC setting.
Disable Disables the LOC Detection.
Ring Port0
LOC Detection (radio button) Click (select) to enable the use of MEP Index.
MEP Index
Ring Port1
LOC Detection (radio button) Click (select) to enable the use of MEP Index. This
MEP Index option does not need to be set for Sub-Ring
(Interconnection Node).

11. Step 4 Setting Confirmation Screen window appears to show the specified
information. Verify the displayed information, then click the OK button.
Figure 8-158 Step 4 Setting Confirmation Screen

The ERP Setting window updates the information.



8.8.2 Modify ERP Setting
Procedure 8-32
Function Setting to select ERP Setting. The ERP Setting window appears.
3. Click the Ring ID link of the target.

click Ring ID
Step 1 ERP Setting option window appears.
 Go to 8.8.1 Configure ERP, and proceed with the procedure from Step 7. to
Step

8.8.3 Delete ERP Setting
Procedure 8-33
Function Setting to select ERP Setting. The ERP Setting window appears.
3. Click the Delete REP tool button.

Delete REP tool button
The Delete REP option window appears.

4. From the Ring ID drop-down list, select the Ring ID to be deleted, then click
the OK button.
Figure 8-163 Delete ERP Option Window


7. ERP Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed

information.
Registration has been removed.

8.9 Link Aggregation Setting

NOTES:
1. For the Radio System, LAG should be assigned by the Radio Traffic
Aggregation that is provided in the Radio Configuration. See the subsection
4.5 Radio Configuration for details.
2. When the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, the Link Aggregation is
available only for the traffic whose MPLS-TP Port Mode is UNI (VLAN-
Based). Link Aggregation of the NNI/UNI (Port-Based) is to be supported in
future releases.
8.9.1 Frame Distribution Rules in VLAN Mode

In the VLAN mode, the frame distribution rule can be selected from the following
three distribution rules:
L2 Base: MAC SA + MAC DA + VID + Ether Type

L3 Base: Src/Dst IP Address + Src/Dst TCP/UDP Port
MPLS Base: Distribution rule is based on the multi-protocol labels.
8.9.2 Frame Distribution Rules in MPLS-TP Mode

Following describe the frame distribution rules carried out in the Dual-Stack
Configuration where both the MPLS-TP traffic and VLAN traffic exist. Referring to
the ingress frames, distribution rules are applied to the egress frames at LAG.
In the MPLS-PT mode, the frame distribution rule can be selected from the following
three distribution rules:
L2 Base: MAC SA + MAC DA + VID + Ether Type

L3 Base: Src/Dst IP Address + Src/Dst TCP/UDP Port
MPLS-TP Base:Distribution Rule is automatically selected according to
the ingress frames.
 LAG Member of UNI Port

 NNI ➜ UNI (LAG) MPLS-TP Frame Inner MAC DA+SA
 UNI ➜ UNI (LAG) MAC DA+SA
 LAG Member of NNI Port

 UNI ➜ NNI (LAG) MAC DA+SA
 NNI ➜ NNI (LAG) MPLS-TP Label

8.9.2.1 Isolate NNI LAG and UNI (VLAN-Based) from

UNI (VLAN-Based) to Distribute
The LAG Distribution Rules are applied to the egress frames at LAG, where the rule
to be applied has been determined as those frames were at the ingress side.
 Recommended Distribution Rules
Table 8-29 Distribution Rule to Select
Condition Distribution Rule to Select
Isolate NNI LAG, UNI (VLAN-Based) from UNI L2 Base

(VLAN-Based)
L3 Base
Figure 8-167 UNI ➜ NNI LAG, UNI ➜ UNI LAG (Example)
MPLS-TP NETWORK NNI LAG
➀ ➁
L2 NETWORK
Ingress frames are to be Distribution rules are to be

referred to for distribution rules. applied at LAG egress side.
UNI UNI UNI (VLAN-Based)
(VLAN) (VLAN) LAG
For cases ➀ and ➁ in the example above, any distribution rule of L2 Base, L3 Base
or MPLS-TP Base is available. However, using the MPLS-TP Base rule, the
advanced distribution cannot be carried out since MAC SA+DA will be the only to be
referred to.

8.9.2.2 Isolate UNI (VLAN-Based) LAG from NNI to Distribute
 Recommended Distribution Rule
Isolate UNI (VLAN-Based) LAG from NNI MPLS-TP Base
Figure 8-168 NNI ➜ UNI LAG (Example)
MPLS-TP NETWORK NNI
L2 NETWORK
UNI (VLAN-Based)
LAG
For a case ➂ in the example above, MPLS-TP Base rule distributes the frames
referring to inner MAC DA+SA.
Using the distribution rules of L2 Base and L3 Base in the MPLS-TP traffic
distributes the frames referring to inner MAC DA+SA also.

8.9.2.3 Isolate NNI LAG and UNI (VLAN-Based) LAG from

 Recommended Distribution Rules
Isolate NNI LAG, UNI (VLAN-Based) LAG from L2 Base

UNI (VLAN-Based)
L3 Base
Figure 8-169 UNI ➜ NNI LAG, UNI LAG (Example)
MPLS-TP NETWORK NNI LAG
➃ ➄
L2 NETWORK
UNI
(VLAN-Based)
UNI (VLAN-Based)
LAG
For cases ➃ and ➄ in the example above, any distribution rule of L2 Base, L3 Base
or MPLS-TP Base is available. However, using the MPLS-TP Base rule, the
advanced distribution cannot be carried out since MAC SA+DA will be the only to be
referred to.

8.9.2.4 Isolate UNI (VLAN-Based) LAG from NNI or

 Required Distribution Rule

Isolate UNI (VLAN-Based) LAG from NNI or MPLS-TP Base

UNI (VLAN-Based)
Figure 8-170 UNI ➜ NNI LAG, UNI LAG (Example)
MPLS-TP NETWORK NNI
L2 NETWORK ➆
UNI (VLAN-Based)
LAG
For a case ➅ in the example above, the L2 Base rule in the MPLS-TP cannot
distribute frames since their MAC will be fixed to BC+SA (opposing NE). The L3
Base rule cannot distribute them either since there are no L3 to detect, which results
in the same as using the L2 Base rule.
Frames can be distributed by the MPLS-TP Base rule, referring to the inner MAC
DA+SA.
For a case ➆, frames at UNI (VLAN-Based) side can be distributed by MPLS-TP

Base rule, referring to MAC DA+SA as well.

8.9.2.5 Isolate NNI LAG (LSR) from NNI to Distribute

Isolate NNI LAG (LSR) from NNI MPLS-TP Base
Figure 8-171 NNI ➜ NNI LAG (Example)
MPLS-TP NETWORK MPLS-TP NETWORK
NNI
NNI
Frames can be distributed by the MPLS-TP Base rule that automatically detects the
LSR, and refers to LSP/PW labels.
NOTE: If the number of LSP/PW labels is small, the label distribution by
MPLS-TP may be biased.

8.9.2.6 Isolate NNI LAG (LSR) from UNI/NNI to Distribute

Isolate NNI LAG (LSR) from UNI MPLS-TP Base
Figure 8-172 UNI/NNI ➜ NNI LAG (Example)
MPLS-TP NETWORK MPLS-TP NETWORK
NNI
➇ NNI
UNI (VLAN-Based)
For a case ➇ in the example above, the L2 Base rule cannot distribute the NNI-NNI
LAG frames since their MAC will be fixed to BC+SA (opposing NE). For UNI-NNI
LAG frames, either the L2 Base or L3 Base rule can distribute them, however, the
rule should be set to MPLS-TP Base, which distributes them referring to MAC
DA+SA.

8.9.3 Add Link Aggregation
Procedure 8-34
Function Setting to select Link Aggregation Setting. The Link Aggregation
3. Click the Add LAG tool button.
Figure 8-173 Link Aggregation Setting Window
Add LAG button
NOTE: When the Radio Group for the Radio

Traffic Aggregation has been registered,
the registered information is listed as well.
The Add LAG option window appears.

4. Assign the LAG. Example below adds ETH GRP7:

Figure 8-174 Add LAG Option Window
Table 8-35 Add LAG Option Parameters (1 of 2)
Link Aggregation Group
LAG (read only) Indicates the type of registered ETH GRP.
LAG Name (text field) Enter the Link Aggregation Group name to apply. Valid
value is 0 to 32 characters long.
Mode LACP-Active Outputs frames along the configured links regardless of

settings on the other side. Selecting this value enables
[This option is for ETH GRP only.] the TX Interval option.
LACP-Passive Outputs or not to output depending on the settings on

the other side; outputs frames if the other side’s control
value is Active.Selecting this value enables the TX
Interval option.
Static Static operation mode using no LACP. Selecting this

value enables Revertive option.
TX Interval Short Sets the an output interval of LACPDUs mode for one
[For LACP Mode only.] second.
Long Selects an output interval of LACPDUs mode for 30

seconds.

Table 8-35 Add LAG Option Parameters (2 of 2)
Revertive Revertive Switches the active port back to the original port when
[For Static Mode only.] recovered.
Non Revertive Does not switch the active port back even if recovered.
Distribution ( inVLAN L2 Base [default] Distribution is based on the Source &

Rule Mode) Destination MAC, VLAN ID, Ethernet Type and Physical
Port ID.
L3 Base Distribution is based on the Source & Destination IP,

Source & Destination TCP/UDP Port number.
MPLS Base Distribution is based on the Multiprotocol Labels.
(in MPLS-TP L2 Base Distribution is based on the Source & Destination MAC,
Mode) VLAN ID, Ethernet Type and Physical Port ID.
L3 Base Distribution is based on the Source & Destination IP,

Source & Destination TCP/UDP Port number.
MPLS-TP [default] Frames are distributed by the types of ingress

Base frames at LAG. See 8.9.2 Frame Distribution Rules in
MPLS-TP Mode for details.
Link Aggregation Port
LAG Not Used To assign the LAG, select ETH GRP.
ETH GRP
Port Role Active Specify each port to Active/Standby. At least one port
must be the Active.
Standby
5. When the parameters are specified, click the OK button.

The Link Aggregation Setting window updates the window.



8.9.4 Modify LAG Registration
Parameters that can be modified are LAG Name and Distribution Rule only.
Procedure 8-35
3. Click the Modify Link Aggregation tool button.

Modify Link Aggregation button
Link Aggregation Setting option window appears.

Figure 8-178 Link Aggregation Setting Option Window
select LAG
i) Select the target LAG (Link Aggregation Group) from the LAG drop-down list.
ii) Modify applicable parameters.
iii) Click the OK button when completed.

The Link Aggregation Setting window updates the window.



8.9.5 Delete LAG Registration
Procedure 8-36
3. Click the Delete LAG tool button.

Delete LAG tool button
The Delete LAG option window appears.

4. Tick a check box of the LAG to be removed, then click the OK button. Ticking
the check box on the title bar selects all.
Figure 8-182 Delete LAG Option Window
check box

The Link Aggregation Setting window updates the information.



8.10 QoS/Classification Setting
 Classify Setting Tab
iPASOLINK supports QoS based on MEF10 and REC4115, which classifies the
traffic into eight or four classes with the proper Internal Priority according to the
predetermined profile. Except for the default profile, a user can configure up to three
additional profiles, which provides a capability of realizing the flexible and user-
orientated QoS strategy. The Internal Priority is used for the following purposes:
i) Properly identifies the ingress traffic according to the predetermined Priority.
ii) Maps the eight classes of ingress traffic to four or eight classes at queuing the
egress traffic.
iii) Copies the original internal priority to the encapsulated frame to prevent the
traffic priority from changing unexpectedly. (VLAN C-tag CoS/VLAN S-tag
CoS)
Three modes are available for QoS Classification.

1. Equipment Based QoS Mode (default)
QoS classification policies are determined by per-equipment basis. One
classification profile is activated, and up to three profiles are stored on the
equipment configuration. In this mode, most outer QoS field of the packet can be
specified for the classification policy.
For the system where the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, this option is
2. Port Based QoS Mode

QoS classifica.tion policies are determined by per-port basis. In this mode, inner
QoS field of the packet can be specified for the classification policy.
3. VLAN ID Based QoS Mode

QoS classification policies are determined by per-VLAN ID basis. In this mode,
VLAN ID field of the packet can be specified for the classification policy.

 Policer Setting Tab

At the ingress traffic, the internal priority is assigned to the frame to perform the
flow control according to the predetermined policer and the Yellow or Green
Marker that is applied to the frame to define whether to discard or forward the
frame.
 Shaper Setting
At the egress traffic, frames are queued according to the internal priority where the
Yellow or Green Marker is applied to determine whether to discard or forward the
frame.
For the system where the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, VLAN Shaper
option is currently not available.

8.10.1 Classify Setting Tab
8.10.1.1 Set Classification Mode
Procedure 8-37
Function Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/
Classification Setting window appears.
3. Click the Classification Mode option.

Figure 8-185 QoS/Classification Setting Window
Classification Mode
The Classification Mode option window appears.

4. Select the mode from the Classification Mode drop-down list:

Figure 8-186 Classification Mode Option Window
Table 8-36 Classification Mode Options
Classification Mode Equipment Based QoS Mode QoS classification policies are determined by per-
equipment basis. One classification profile is
activated, and up to three profiles are stored on the
equipment configuration. In this mode, most outer
QoS field of the packet can be specified for the
classification policy.
This option is currently not available when the
Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP.
Port Based QoS Mode QoS classification policies are determined by per-port
basis. In this mode, inner QoS field of the packet can
be specified for the classification policy.
VLAN ID Based QoS Mode QoS classification policies are determined by per-
VLAN ID basis. In this mode, VLAN ID field of the
packet can be specified for the classification policy.
This option is currently not available when the
Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP.

7. The Classification Setting window updates the information. Verify that the
selected mode is indicated.

8.10.1.2 Edit Profile
Procedure 8-38
3. Verify that the Classification Mode indicate Equipment Based QoS Mode.
To change the mode, proceed with 8.10.1 Classify Setting Tab.
4. Click the Edit Profile tool button.

 Clicking the Default Port Priority or Overwrite options opens the same option
window.
Edit Profile tool button
The Edit Classification Profile option window appears.

5. Edit Classification Profile option window appears. Specify parameters, then

Figure 8-189 Edit Classification Profile Option Window
Table 8-37 Edit Classification Profile Options
Profile (available profile #) Indicates the registered profile #. Select

the profile to edit.
Profile Name (text field) Enter the profile name.
Mapping Field CoS Uses VLAN (CoS) of received frame for

Classification.
TC Uses MPLS (Traffic Class) of received

frame for Classification.
DSCP Uses IP Address (DSCP) of received

frame for Classification.
Classify Classify Internal Priority 0 to 7 Specifies the priority of internal use

Priority frames to map.
Color Green The priority is mapped to color green.

[default]
Yellow The priority is mapped to color yellow.


7. QoS/Classification Setting window updates the information.

Figure 8-191 QoS Classification Setting Window

8.10.1.3 Specify Equipment Based QoS Mode
Procedure 8-39
3. Verify that the Classification Mode indicate Equipment Based QoS Mode.
4. Click the Mapping Mode option.

 Clicking the Default Port Priority or Overwrite options opens the same option
window.
Mapping Mode Overwrite Default Port Priority
The Select Mapping Mode option window appears.

5. Specify the parameters.

Figure 8-193 Select Mapping Mode Option Window
Mapping Mode Transparent Uses the CoS as the equipment internal priority.
Profile (Equipment) Maps the equipment internal priority according to the

Classification Profile.
Default Port Priority 0 to 7 Specifies the default priority.
Priority Overwrite (check box) Tick a box to enable the overwrite settings, which
allows the equipment internal priority following the
Classification to overwrite the QoS value of the output
frame.

The QoS/Classification Setting window updates the information.

Figure 8-195 QoS Classification Setting Window

8.10.1.4 Specify Port Based QoS Mode
Procedure 8-40
3. Verify that the Classification Mode indicate Port Based QoS Mode.
4. Click the link in the Port fields of the target object.

click


Fixed Uses the Default Priority as the equipment internal

priority.
(Profile No.) Maps the equipment internal priority according to the

frame.



8.10.1.5 Specify VLAN ID Based QoS Mode
Procedure 8-41
3. Verify that the Classification Mode indicate VLAN ID Based QoS Mode.
4. Click the link of the target VLAN ID.

click


Fixed Uses the Default Priority as the equipment internal

priority.
(Profile No.) Maps the equipment internal priority according to the

frame.



8.10.2 Policer Setting Tab
8.10.2.1 Add Policer Index
Procedure 8-42
Function Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting.
3. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears. In the Policer Setting

tabbed page, click Add Policer Index tool button.

click
Policer Setting tab
The Add Policer Index option window appears.


 Specify the parameters in Add Policer Index option window.
 Click the Policer Profile Detail tool button to open the Policer Profile Detail
Setting option window, then specify the parameters there.
 Click the OK button of the Policer Profile Detail Setting option window.
 Click the OK button of the Add Policer Index option window.
Policer Profile Detail Setting

Option Window
click
Policer Profile Detail tool button
Add Policer Index Option Window

Table 8-41 Add Policer Index Options
Policer Index 1 to 256 Enter the Index number to assign.
Item (card/LAG providing Select the item providing the target port.
available port)
Port (available ports) Select the target port.
Priority 0 to 7, Any Select the target priority.
Policer Profile No. 1 to 64 Select a number to assign the Policer Profile No.
VLAN ID (check box) Tick a box to enable the following options.

iPASOLINK VR does not support the profile per VLAN
for a port of NNI/UNI (Port-Based) in the MPLS-TP
mode, thus this option is disabled, For a port of UNI
(VLAN-Based), that is supported, this option is
available.
Enable (radio button) Click a radio button of the VLAN to be enabled.
VLAN ID (read only) Indicates the registered VLAN IDs.
VLAN Service Name (read only) Indicates the VLAN Service Names of the registered
VLAN.
Table 8-42 Policer Profile Detail Setting Options
EIR 0 to 10000000 Specifies the Excess Information Rate. [unit: kbit/s]
CIR 0 to 10000000 Specifies the Committed Information Rate. [unit: kbit/s]
EBS 0 to 128 Specifies the Excess Burst Size. [unit: kbit/s]
CBS 0 to 64 Specifies the Committed Burst Size [unit: kbit/s]



8.10.2.2 Modify Policer Index
Parameters of CoS, Policer Profile No., VLAN ID and Policer Profile Detail
Setting (EIR, CIR, EBS, CBS) can be modified.
Procedure 8-43

tabbed page, click the link of target Policer Index number.
click
The Policer Setting option window appears.


 Specify the parameters in Add Policer Index option window.
 Click the Policer Profile Detail tool button to open the Policer Profile Detail
Setting option window, then specify the parameters there.
 Click the OK button of the Policer Profile Detail Setting option window.
 Click the OK button of the Add Policer Index option window.
Policer Profile Detail Setting

Option Window
click
Policer Profile Detail tool button
Policer Setting Option Window

Table 8-43 Policer Setting Options
Policer Index (read only) Indicates the selected index number.
Item (read only) Indicates the port type assigned to the selected index.
Port (read only) Indicates the port number assigned to the selected index.
Priority 0 to 7, Any Select the target priority to modify
Policer Profile No. 1 to 64 Select a number to modify the Policer Profile No.
VLAN ID162 (check box) Tick a box to enable the following options.
iPASOLINK VR does not support the profile per VLAN for a
port of NNI/UNI (Port-Based) in the MPLS-TP mode, thus
this option is disabled, For a port of UNI (VLAN-Based), that
is supported, this option is available.
Enable (radio button) Click a radio button of the VLAN to be enabled.
VLAN ID (read only) Indicates the registered VLAN IDs.
VLAN Service Name (read only) Indicates the VLAN Service Names of the registered VLAN.
EIR 0 to 10000000 Modify the Excess Information Rate. [unit: kbit/s]
CIR 0 to 10000000 Modify the Committed Information Rate. [unit: kbit/s]
EBS 0 to 128 Modify the Excess Burst Size. [unit: kbit/s]
CBS 0 to 64 Modify the Committed Burst Size [unit: kbit/s]



8.10.2.3 Delete Policer Index
Procedure 8-44

tabbed page, click the Delete Policer Index tool button.
Delete Policer Index tool button
The Delete Policer Index option window appears.

4. Enter the Policer Index number to delete, then click the OK button.
Figure 8-213 Delete Policer Index Option Window

6. When the process is completed, another Information dialog box appears.

Click the OK button to proceed.
7. The QoS/Classification Setting window updates the information.


8.10.2.4 Policer Profile Setting
Procedure 8-45

tabbed page, click the Policer Profile Setting tool button.
Policer Profile Setting tool button
The Policer Profile Setting option window appears.

4. Click the link of the target profile number.

Figure 8-218 Policer Profile Setting Option Window
click
5. Policer Profile Detail Setting option window appears. Edit the values, then
Figure 8-219 Policer Profile Detail Setting Window

EIR 0 to 10000000 Modify the Excess Information Rate. [unit: kbit/s]
CIR 0 to 10000000 Modify the Committed Information Rate. [unit: kbit/s]
EBS 0 to 128 Modify the Excess Burst Size. [unit: kbit/s]
CBS 0 to 64 Modify the Committed Burst Size [unit: kbit/s]

7. Policer Profile Setting option window updates the information. Click the
Close button.
NOTE: QoS/Classification Setting window may require to click the

Refresh tool button to update its information.
Figure 8-221 Policer Profile Setting Option Window

8.10.3 Shaper Setting
NOTE: For the system where the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, VLAN
Shaper option is currently not available.
8.10.3.1 QoS Class and Shaper Setting
Procedure 8-46
3. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears. In the Shaper Setting

tabbed page, click the link of Number of Queue or VLAN Shaper.

click
The Number of Queue Setting option window appears.

4. Specify the parameters, then click the OK button.

Figure 8-223 Number of Queue Setting Option Window
Table 8-46 Number of Queue Setting Options
Number of Queue 4 Classes QoS Specifies that the number of Shaper Classes is four, which
enables eight Shaper Groups including the Remaining Groups.
8 Classes QoS Specifies that the number of Shaper Classes is eight, which
enables four Shaper Groups including the Remaining Group.
[default]
VLAN Shaper Enable Enables the VLAN Shaper settings.
Disable Disables the VLAN Shaper settings.
The priority in each mode is defined according to the following table:
Priority 8-Class 4-Class
7 7 3
6 6 3
5 5 2
4 4 2
3 3 1
2 2 1
1 1 0
0 0 0



Figure 8-225 QoS/Classification Setting

8.10.3.2 Edit Profile
Procedure 8-47

tabbed page, click the Edit Profile tool button.
Edit Profile tool button
The Edit Queue Profile option window appears.


Figure 8-227 Edit Queue Profile Option Window
Table 8-47 Number of Queue Setting Options (1 of 2)
Profile No. 1 to 15 Specify the Shaper Queue Profile number.
Profile Name (text field) Enter the profile name within 0 to 32 characters long
Drop Mode WTD Specifies Weighted Tail Drop (WTD) for the method to discard frames.
WRED Specifies Weighted Random Early detection (WRED)
Egress Queue 0 to 7 Indicates the Egress Queue number.
MAX Rate 1 to 10000 Enter the maximum bandwidths guaranteed rate. It is recommended to
set 3 or greater when changing the Queue Length from the default value.
[unit: Mbit/s; default: 1000]
MIN Rate 0 to 10000 Enter the minimum bandwidths guaranteed rate.


Table 8-47 Number of Queue Setting Options (2 of 2)
Scheduling Mode SP Specifies Strict Priority (SP) for Scheduler setting, which gives prior frame
process to target Shaper than that of DWRR specified Shaper Group.
[default]
DWRR Specifies the Deficit Weighted Round Robin (DWRR) for Scheduler
setting. The frame process is carried out according to the weight rate
specified by the DWRR Weight value.
Selecting DWRR enables the DWRR Weight parameter on the right.
DWRR Weight 1 to 127 Set the priority for DWRR Scheduling Mode. This parameter is disabled
when the Scheduling Mode selects SP.
Queue Length 16 to 65536 Specifies the Egress Queue size for the Service Class. [unit: k byte;
default: 64]
 The default value is recommended for GbE Port.
 The value 128 or greater is recommended for 10GbE Port.
The available value range differs depending on the state:
Table 8-48
State [M byte] Range of Value
2 16 to 1024
16 16 to 16384
64 16 to 65536
When the external packet buffer is disabled, the value greater than 1024
cannot be specified.
WTD Yellow TH 10 to 100 Specifies the WTD (Weighted Tail Drop) threshold value to the color
yellow. [unit: %; default: 100]
WRED Yellow TH 10 to 100 Specifies the WRED (Weighted Random Early Detection) threshold value
to the color yellow. [unit: %; default: 70]
WRED Green TH 10 to 100 Specifies the WRED (Weighted Random Early Detection) threshold value
to the color green. [unit: %; default: 70]
Figure 8-228 Egress Queue (example: 1xSP+3xDWRR
Class3
Class2
WTD Yellow Frame

Threshold 70% (default) Class1
Queue Length (16 – 1024 kbytes)

Class0



8.10.3.3 Edit Egress Shaper Rate
Procedure 8-48

tabbed page, click the link in the Shaper Rate field.
click
The Port Shaper Rate Setting option window appears.

4. Select the rate, then click the OK button.

Figure 8-232 Port Shaper Rate Setting Option Window
Egress Shaper Rate 1 to 10000 Specify the egress shaper rate. [unit: Mbit/s]

6. The QoS/Classification Setting window updates the Shaper Rate

information.

8.10.3.4 Modify Queue Profile
Procedure 8-49

tabbed page, click the link in the Grp. field.
click
The Select Queue Profile option window appears.


Figure 8-236 Select Queue Profile Option Window
Priority Queue (available profile #) Select a Priority Queue Profile number to modify.
Profile
MAX Rate 1 to 10000 Enter the maximum bandwidths guaranteed rate.

MIN Rate 0 to 10000 Enter the minimum bandwidths guaranteed rate.

Scheduling Mode SP Specifies Strict Priority (SP) for Scheduler setting, which gives
prior frame process to target Shaper than that of DWRR
specified Shaper Group. [default]
DWRR Specifies the Deficit Weighted Round Robin (DWRR) for

Scheduler setting. The frame process is carried out according
to the weight rate specified by the DWRR Weight value.
Selecting DWRR enables the DWRR Weight parameter on the
right.
DWRR Weight 1 to 127 Set the priority for DWRR Scheduling Mode. This parameter is
disabled when the Scheduling Mode selects SP.



8.10.3.5 Edit Shaper Group Member
Procedure 8-50

tabbed page, click the link in the VLAN field.
click
Shaper Group Member List option window appears.

4. Click the Edit Shaper Group Member tool button.

Figure 8-240 Shaper Group Member List Option Window (VLAN Mode)
Edit Shaper Group Member tool button
Figure 8-241 Shaper Group Member List Option Window (MPLS-TP Mode)
Edit Shaper Group Member tool button
The Edit Shaper Group Member option window appears.


Figure 8-242 Edit Shaper Group Member Option Window
Table 8-51 Edit Shaper Group Member Options
VLAN ID (registered VLAN #) Select a Priority Queue Profile number to modify.
Shaper Group 1 to 7 Specifies a selected VLAN to the Shaper Group.
Remaining Selected VLAN is not assigned to any Shaper Groups.

All MPLS-TP frames that entered at the port whose
MPLS-TP Port Mode is NNI belong to this option
(Remaining).

7. Click the Close button of the Shaper Group Member List option window.
The QoS/Classification Setting window returns.


8.11 Filter Settings
8.11.1 Filter List Tab
8.11.1.1 Add Filter List
Procedure 8-51
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.16
Function Setting to select Filter Setting. The Filter Setting window appears.
3. In the Filter List tabbed page, click the Add tool button:
Figure 8-245 Filter Setting Window — Filter List Tab
Filter List tab

Add tool button
Add Filter Entry option window appears.

4. Specify the filter conditions, then click the OK button.

Figure 8-246 Add Filter Entry Option Window
Table 8-52 Add Filter Entry Parameters

Filter Type (read only) Indicates the filter type.
Filtering Rule
Filtering Mode (read only) Indicates the filtering mode.
Source MAC Any Selecting Any specifies no particular source MAC address to filter.
Address
(text field) Unticking (removing a tick from) the Any check box enables the text field
below. Enter the Source MAC Address (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx) to filter.
Destination MAC Any Selecting Any specifies no particular destination MAC address to filter.
Address
(text field) Unticking (removing a tick from) the Any check box enables the text field
below. Enter the Destination MAC Address (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx) to filter.
CoS Any Selecting Any specifies no particular CoS value to filter.
0 to 7 Unticking (removing a tick from) the Any check box enables the text field
below. Enter the CoS value to filter.
VLAN ID Any Selecting Any specifies no particular VLAN ID to filter.
1 to 4094 Unticking (removing a tick from) the Any check box enables the text field
below. Enter the VLAN ID to filter.
Ethernet Type Any Selecting Any specifies no particular Ethernet Type to filter.
0x0000 to Unticking (removing a tick from) the Any check box enables the text field
0xFFFF below. Enter the Destination MAC Address to filter.


6. The Filter Setting window (Filter Lithe newly added entry.


8.11.1.2 Modify Filter List
Procedure 8-52
3. In the Filter List tabbed page, click the Entry Index number of the target filter:
Entry Index Filter List tab
Modify Filter Entry option window appears.

4. Modify the filter conditions. See Table 8-52 Add Filter Entry Parameters for
descriptions regarding the parameters.
Figure 8-250 Modify Filter Entry Option Window
5. When the modification is completed, click the OK button. Information dialog

box appears.

The Filter Setting window (Filter List tab) updates the information.



8.11.1.3 Delete Filter List
Procedure 8-53
3. In the Filter List tabbed page, click the Delete tool button.
Figure 8-253 Filter Setting — Filter List Tab
Delete tool button
Filter List tab
Delete Filter Entry option window appears.

4. Tick a check box of the target filter, then click the OK button. Ticking a box on
top selects all.
Figure 8-254 Delete Filter Entry Option Window





8.11.2 Profile List Tab
8.11.2.1 Add Profile List
Procedure 8-54
expand ETH Function Setting to select Filter Setting. The Filter Setting
window appears.
3. In the Profile List tabbed page, click the Add tool button:
Figure 8-258 Filter Setting Window — Profile List Tab
Add tool button

Profile List tab (see NOTE:)
NOTE: In the MPLS-TP mode, the column next to this column shows MPLS-TP Port
Mode.
Add Filter Profile option window appears.

4. Tick (leave a tick in a) Select check box(es) of the profile(s) to add, and
specify Filter Profile Name and Filtering Mode.
Figure 8-259 Add Filter Profile Option Window
Table 8-53 Add Filter Entry Parameters
Profile Index (read only) The index number is automatically applied.
Filter Profile Name (text field) Enter the profile name. Up to
Filtering Mode Deny
Permit
5. Click the OK button

The Filter Setting window (Profile List tab) updates the information.



8.11.2.2 Modify Profile List
Procedure 8-55
expand ETH Function Setting to select Filter Setting. The Filter Setting
window appears.
3. In the Profile List tabbed page, click the Profile Index number of the target
profile.
click (see NOTE:)
Profile List tab
NOTE: When in the MPLS-TP mode, the column next to this column shows
MPLS-TP Port Mode.
Modify Filter Profile option window appears.

4. Modify parameters, then click the OK button.

Figure 8-263 Modify Filter Profile Option Window

The Filter Setting window (Profile List tab) updates the information.



8.11.2.3 Delete Profile List
Procedure 8-56
3. Click the Profile List tab, then click the Delete tool button.
Delete tool button

(see NOTE:)
Profile List tab
TP Port Mode.
Delete Filter Entry option window appears.

4. Tick (click to leave a tick in) a check box of the target filter, then click the OK
button. Ticking a box on top selects all.
Figure 8-267 Delete Filter Entry Option Window





8.11.3 Port Filter Settings
Procedure 8-57
3. In the Port Filter Setting List tabbed page, click the Port number of the target
port.
Figure 8-271 Filter Setting Window — Port Filter Setting List Tab
Profile List tab

Port Number
Ingress Filter Setting option window appears.

4. Select a Profile Index to apply, then click the OK button.

Figure 8-272 Ingress Filter Setting Option Window
NOTE: In the Profile Index drop-down list, the listed items excluding
Not Used have been created at the procedure earlier in the
Filter Settings.

6. The Filter Setting window (Port Filter Setting List tab) updates the information.

8.12 L2CP Transparent Setting

NOTE: When the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, this option is available only
on ports whose MPLS-TP Port Mode is UNI (VLAN-Based).
Procedure 8-58
Function Setting to select L2CP Transparent Setting. The L2CP Transparent
3. Click the Port number of the target.

Figure 8-275 L2CP Transparent Setting Window
(see NOTE:)
click
TP Port Mode.
L2CP Transparent Setting option window appears.

4. Select a Protocol to be tunneled, then click the OK button.

Figure 8-276 L2CP Transparent Setting Option Window
Table 8-54 L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting Parameters
L2 Protocol Transparency
Tunnel Enable (check box) Tick a box of protocol to enable its PDU to transparent
without processing.
NOTE: STP/RSTP Tunnel is not supported on the RSTP enabled port.

The window returns to L2CP Transparent Setting window.

Figure 8-278 L2CP Transparent Setting Window
(see NOTE:)
NOTE: Wehn in the MPLS-TP mode, the column next to this column shows MPLS-
TP Port Mode.

8.13 Mirroring Setting

NOTES:
1. The available frame size to operate the mirroring function is the maximum
frame size minus 16 bytes. See 8.2.2 Max Frame Size Setting for the
specified maximum frame size.
2. In the MPLS-TP mode, the Mirroring Ports can be set on the ports whose
MPLS-TP Port Mode is UNI (VLAN-Based) only.
Procedure 8-59
Function Setting to select Mirroring Setting. The Mirroring Setting window
appears.
3. Click the Modify tool button.

Figure 8-279 Mirroring Setting Window
Modify tool button (see NOTE:)
TP Port Mode.
Mirroring Setting option window appears.

4. Set card(s) for mirroring, then click the OK button.

Figure 8-280 Mirroring Setting Option Window

The window returns to Mirroring Setting window.

Figure 8-282 Mirroring Setting Window
(see NOTE:)
TP Port Mode.

8.14 Port Isolate Setting

NOTE: For the system where the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, this function
is currently not available.
Procedure 8-60
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then submenu ETH
Function Setting to select Port Isolate Setting. The Port Isolate Setting
window appears.
3. Click the Port number of the target.

Figure 8-283 Port Isolate Setting Window
Port number (see NOTE:)
TP Port Mode.
Port Isolate Setting option window appears.

4. Set or disable the Port Isolate, then click the OK button.

Figure 8-284 Port Isolate Option Window
Table 8-55 Port Isolate Parameters
Port Isolate Disable Disables the Port Isolate function.
Isolate GRP# Select the group number to enable Port Isolate.

6. The Port Isolate Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.
Figure 8-286 Port Isolate Setting Window
(see NOTE:)
TP Port Mode.

8.15 LLF Setting
8.15.1 Add LLF Group
Procedure 8-61
Function Setting to select LLF Setting. The LLF Setting window appears.
3. Click the Add LLF button.

Figure 8-287 LLF Setting Window and LLF Setting (Add) Option Window
Add LLF tool button (see NOTE:)
TP Port Mode.
The LLF Setting (Add) option window appears.

Figure 8-288 LLF Setting (Add) Option Window

Table 8-56 LLF Setting Parameters
LLF GRP ID 1 to 16 Specifies the LLF Group ID Number.
Trunk Port Setting
Item (available card) Selects the target card.
Port (available port) Selects the target port. In the MPLS-TP mode, this column
shows the MPLS-TP Port mode.
Send LLF Signal Enable Enables sending the LLF Signals.

(This option is currently not editable.)
Ignore Received LLF Enable Ignores a received LLF Signal.

Signal
Disable Accepts received LLF Signal.
Edge Port Setting
—— (check box) Tick the check box to set the port as Edge Port. In the MPLS-
TP mode, Port Name / LAG Name column shows the MPLS-
TP Port Mode.
OAM Send Port Setting OAM Send Port Setting option is added for the operation regarding IEEE802.3ah
(LINK OAM), which is currently not supported by iPASOLINK VR. Checks should
be removed from all the check boxes, If checked. LLF function does not operate
properly, e.g., LLF will not shut down an Ethernet Port by detecting a Trunk Port
failure.
5. Following dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.


The LLF Setting window updates the information.

Figure 8-291 LLF Setting Window
(see NOTE:)
TP Port Mode.

8.15.2 Modify LLF Group
Procedure 8-62
3. Click an LLF GRP ID number of the target LLF. The LLF Setting (Modify)
option window appears.
LLF GRP numbers (see NOTE:)
TP Port Mode.
The LLF Setting (Modify) option window appears.

4. Modify the settings, then click the OK button.

Figure 8-293 LLF Setting (Modify) Option Window

Table 8-57 LLF Setting (Modify) Parameters
LLF GRP ID (read only) Indicates the selected LLF GRP ID number.
Trunk Port Setting
Item (available card) Selects to change the target card.
Port (available port) Selects to change the target port. In the MPLS-TP mode, a
column of MPLS-TP Port Mode is added.
Send LLF Signal Enable Enables sending the LLF Signals.

(This option is currently not editable.)
Disable
Ignore Received LLF Enable Ignores a received LLF Signal.

Signal
Disable Accepts received LLF Signal.
Edge Port Setting
—— (check box) Tick the check box to set the port as Edge Port. In the MPLS-TP
mode, a column of MPLS-TP Port Mode is added.
OAM Send Port Setting OAM Send Port Setting option is added for the operation regarding IEEE802.3ah
(LINK OAM), which is currently not supported by iPASOLINK VR. All check boxes
must be unchecked. If checked, LLF function does not operate properly, e.g., LLF
will not shut down an Ethernet Port by detecting a Trunk Port failure.

The LLF Setting window updates the information.


(see NOTE:)
TP Port Mode.

8.15.3 Delete LLF Group
Procedure 8-63
3. Click the Delete LLF GRP button:

Delete LLF tool button (see NOTE:)
TP Port Mode.
LLF Setting (Delete) option window appears.

4. Select the LLF GRP ID number of the target to be removed, then click the OK
button:
Figure 8-297 LLF Setting (Modify) Option Window

6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed:

7. The LLF Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.
(see NOTE:)
TP Port Mode.

8.16 Broadcast Storm Control Setting

Following procedure sets the input rate for the broadcast storm control, and enables/
disable the Broadcast Storm Control per Ethernet port (including MODEM port).
In the MPLS-TP mode, this option is available for the port whose MPLS-TP Port
Mode is UNI (Port-Based/VLAN-Based). (This option is not available for NNI ports.)
8.16.1 Set Broadcast Strom Control Rate
Procedure 8-64
Function Setting to select Broadcast Storm Control Setting. The Broadcast
Storm Control Setting window appears.
3. Click the Broadcast Storm Control Rate.

Figure 8-301 Broadcast Storm Control Setting Window
Broadcast Storm Control Rate (see NOTE:)
TP Port Mode.
The Broadcast Storm Control Rate option window appears.

4. Specify the input rate of the target frames for Broadcast Storm Control, then
Figure 8-302 Broadcast Storm Control Rate Option Window
Table 8-58 Broadcast Storm Control Rate Parameters
Broadcast Storm Control Rate 1 to 1000 Mbps Sets the input rate of the frame for the
Broadcast Storm Control. [unit: Mbps]

6. The Broadcast Storm Control Setting window, updates the Broadcast

Storm Control Rate value.
(see NOTE:)
TP Port Mode.

8.16.2 Specify Broadcast Strom Control Settings
Procedure 8-65
Function Setting to select Broadcast Storm Control Setting. The Broadcast
Storm Control Setting window appears.
3. Click the target port to set the Port number.

(see NOTE:)
Port number
NOTE: When in the MPLS-TP mode, the column nest to this column shows MPLS-
TP Port Mode.
Broadcast Storm Control option window appears.

8-228/END Set ETH Function
4. Set Enable or Disable the Broadcast Storm Control by clicking its radio
button, then click the OK button:
Figure 8-306 Broadcast Storm Control Option Window

6. The Broadcast Storm Control Setting window updates the information. Verify
the displayed information.
(see NOTE:)
TP Port Mode.

Set MPLS-TP Function 9-1
9. Set MPLS-TP Function
9.1 Overview
The setting menus here for MPLS-TP Function Setting is enabled when the
Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP. See 4.2 Set Equipment Mode also.
 Equipment Setting
This option specifies the maximum frame sizes. It also can modify the Node ID and
ICC that has been specified by the procedure in 4.2 Set Equipment Mode.
 MPLS-TP Port Setting

This option specifies the MPLS-TP Port mode, NNI, UNI (Port-Based) or UNI
(VLAN-Based).
Modifying the MPLS-TP Port mode will initializes VLAN settings that have been
assigned to the target port.
 LSP Setting
This option specifies the Label Switched Path settings.
 PW Setting
This option provides the pseudowire settings and L2 Encapsulation settings.
 MPLS-TP OAM Setting

This option enables the Fault Management functions and Performance
Management functions, etc., conforming to ITU-T G.8113.1.
When the MPLS-TP Port Mode is UNI (VLAN-Based), using the same VLAN ID
for assigning PW and ETH function enables the PW Port to use the ETH functions,
such as FDB, Filter, QoS and E-OAM.
 Linear Protection Setting

When the system selects MPLS-TP mode, iPASOLINK VR 4 supports the Linear
Protection of 1:1 Bidirectional, conforming to ITU-T G.8131.

9-2 Set MPLS-TP Function
9.1.1 Settings to Proceed
Following show the required settings according to the type of configuring router.
9.1.1.1 Configuring LSR (Label Switching Router)
LSP #A LSP #B
XC
[Cross Connection]
1. MPLS-TP Port Setting
2. LSP Setting
i). LSP Setting Tab
ii) XC Setting Tab
9.1.1.2 Configuring LER (Label Edge Router)
PW BIND
USER PATH
PW LSP
L2 ENCAPSULATION
1. MPLS-TP Port Setting
2. LSP Setting (LSP Setting Tab)
3. PW Setting
i). PW Bind Setting
ii) L2 Encapsulation Setting

9.1.2 Configuring Dual Stack Network
In the MPLS-TP mode, iPASOLINK VR provides the function to forward VLAN to

MPLS-TP, as well as functions that are also available in the VLAN mode, such as to
forward L2 VLAN, and various Ethernet functions. See the illustration below:
Figure 9-1 Dual Stack Network Example
ETHER
VR 4
E1 VR 10
CENTRAL ETHER
VR 4 E1
VR 4
VR 10
MPLS-TP NETWORK VR 4 VR 4 VR 4
VR 4
ETHER RING
VR 4 VR 4
VR 4 VR 4
ETHER ETHER
ETHER VR 4 ETHER
VR 4
E1 ETHER
E1
MPLS-TP
MODE EQUIPMENT MODE
ETHER ETHERNET EQUIPMENT
E1 TDM EQUIPMENT
MPLS-TP FRAME
VLAN FRAME
E1
NNI PORT
UNI (PORT-BASED) PORT
UNI (VLAN-BASED) PORT
In the MPLS-TP mode, it is available to assign both MPLS-TP traffic and VLAN
traffic within the same equipment, or on the same UNI (VLAN-Based) port.
Following shows the example of Dual Stack Configuration enabled in the equipment.

9.1.2.1 UNI (VLAN-Based) — 802.1Q
Figure 9-2 UNI (VLAN-Based) Example (802.1Q)
MPLS-TP PW
C-VLAN 20
MODEM
PORT 6 (SLOT 1)
iPASOLINK VR
L2
C-VLAN 100
PORT 2 PORT 1 PORT 3 PORT 4
tagged frame
untagged/tagged frame
UNI (VLAN-Based) Port 802.1Q NNI
The PORT 1 above accommodates both the MPLS_TP traffic and L2 VLAN.
 MPLS-TP main traffic allows to accommodate the incoming frame at PORT 1 if

its VLAN ID is verified matching the specified VLAN ID.
 MPLS-TP does not accommodate untagged frames.
 Assign Access to PORT 1, and add the specified VLAN ID to accommodate
Untagged frames.
 Assign Trunk to PORT 1 to accommodate frames if their VLAN ID match the
specified VLAN ID.
 Assign Tunnel to PORT 1 to accommodated frames that MPLS-TP does not
accommodate.
NOTE: If the same ID is applied to Tunnel VLAN ID and MPLS-TP PW VLAN

ID, the frames will be accommodated in L2 VLAN in preference,
where no frames will be sent to the MPLS-TP PW.

9.1.2.2 UNI (VLAN-Based) — 802.1ad <in future releases>
Figure 9-3 UNI (VLAN-Based) Example (802.1ad) <in future releases>
MPLS-TP PW
S-VLAN 20
MODEM
PORT 6 (SLOT 1)
iPASOLINK VR
L2
S-VLAN 100
tagged frame
untagged/tagged frame
UNI (VLAN-Based) Port 802.1ad NNI
Example above shows 802.1ad, which allows to accommodate the untagged frames at
C-Access, and frames whose VLAN ID match the specified VLAN ID at S-Trunk.
The PORT 1 above accommodates both the MPLS_TP traffic and L2 VLAN.
 MPLS-TP main traffic allows to accommodate the incoming frame at PORT 1 if

its VLAN ID is verified matching the specified VLAN ID.
 MPLS-TP does not accommodate untagged frames.
 Assign C-Access to PORT 1, and add the specified S-Tags to accommodate the
specified C-VLAN frames.
 Assign S-Trunk to PORT 1 to accommodate frames with the specified S-VLAN
IDs.
 iPASOLINK VR does not support the C-Bridge settings.for the ports that are
shared by MPLS-TP.

9.1.2.3 UNI (Port-Based) — 802.1Q
Following shows the example where UNI (Port-Based) is specified to PORT 1
Figure 9-4 UNI (Port-Based) Example (802.1Q)
MPLS-TP PW
MODEM
PORT 6 (SLOT 1)
iPASOLINK VR
L2
C-VLAN 100
tagged/untagged frame untagged/tagged frame
UNI (Port-Based) Port
 MPLS-TP main traffic allows to accommodate all the incoming main signal
frames at PORT 1 except the frames of Inband, PTP or OAM relevant.
 iPASOLINK VR does not support the L2 VLAN main traffic settings to UNI
(Port-Based) ports.

9.1.2.4 UNI (Port-Based) — 802.1ad <in future releases>
Following shows the example where UNI (Port-Based) is specified to PORT 1
Figure 9-5 UNI (Port-Based) Example (802.1ad) <in future releases>
MPLS-TP PW
MODEM
PORT 6 (SLOT 1)
iPASOLINK VR
L2
S-VLAN 100
tagged/untagged frame tagged frame
NNI
UNI (Port-Based) Port UNI (VLAN-Based) Port 802.1ad
 MPLS-TP main traffic allows to accommodate all the incoming frames at PORT
1 except the frames of Inband, PTP or OAM relevant.
 iPASOLINK VR does not support the L2 VLAN main traffic settings to UNI
(Port-Based) ports.

9.1.2.5 NNI
Following shows the example that the NNI accommodates only the MPLS-TP main
traffic where the frames are forwarded by swapping their labels within NNI to/from
NNI section.
Figure 9-6 LSR Example
MPLS-TP frames
MPLS-TP PW
C-VLAN 20
MODEM
PORT 6 (SLOT 1)
iPASOLINK VR
LSR
L2
C-VLAN 100
tagged frame untagged/tagged frame

9.1.2.6 UNI (VLAN-Based) for MODEM
UNI (VLAN-Based) can be set to MODEM, however, the traffics of UNI (VLAN-
Based) specified MODEM to/from NNI specified MODEM are not supported.
Figure 9-7 MODEM UNI (VLAN-Based) Example
unsupported
MPLS-TP PW
C-VLAN 20
MODEM MODEM
(SLOT 2) (SLOT 1)
iPASOLINK VR
L2
C-VLAN 100
tagged frame

9.1.2.7 Restriction for Using UNI (Port-Based)
iPASOLINK VR supports the UNI (Port-Based) for MPLS-TP traffics only. For the
L2 VLAN traffics, the available UNI is UNI (VLAN-Based) only. Do not attempt to
specify UNI (Port-Based) to L2 VLAN traffics, which is not operational.
Figure 9-8 UNI (Port-Based) Restriction for L2 VLAN Traffic
MPLS-TP PW
MODEM
PORT 6 (SLOT 1)
iPASOLINK VR
L2
C-VLAN 100
tagged/untagged frame
UNI (Port-Based) Port

9.2 Equipment Setting

Specify the maximum frame sizes. The information of MPLS-TP specified by the 4.2
Set Equipment Mode procedure can be modified as well:
Procedure 9-1
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then its submenu MPLS-
TP Function Setting to select Equipment Setting. The Equipment Setting
window appears.
3. Click the Modify tool button:
click
Equipment Setting option window appears.

4. Modify/Specify the parameters:

Figure 9-2 Equipment Setting Option Window
Table 9-1 MODEM Port Setting Parameters
Node ID (0 to 4294957295) (Not editable.)
ICC (A to Z, 0 to 9) ITU-T Carrier Code. (Not editable.)

7. The Equipment Setting window updates the information. Confirm the


9.3 MPLS-TP Port Setting

Following procedures specify the MPLS-TP Port mode.
NOTES:
1. UNI (Port-Based) cannot assigned to the ports on MODEMs.
2. When the selected port has an assignment of PW or LSP, the MPLS-TP

Port Mode cannot be changed.
Procedure 9-2
TP Function Setting to select MPLS-TP Port Setting. The MPLS-TP Port
3. Click the Port link:
Figure 9-5 MPLS-TP Port Setting Window

click
MPLS-TP Port Setting option window appears.

4. Select the port mode:
Figure 9-6 MPLS-TP Port Setting Option Window
Table 9-2 MPLS-TP Port Mode Parameters
MPLS-TP Port Mode UNI (Port Based) Select this option when managing the MPLS-TP
encapsulation per port.
UNI (VLAN Based) Select this option when managing the MPLS-TP
encapsulation per VLAN. Only this option allows the
MPLS-TP traffic to be operational with the L2 VLAN
traffic.
NNI MSE Port and ETH Ports cannot select NNI (must select
either UNI). [default]
6. Warning dialog box appears. Check the system if it is okay to be restarted,


8. The Equipment Setting window updates the information.

9.4 LSP Setting

Specify the Label Switched Paths by the following procedure.
9.4.1 LSP Setting Tab
9.4.1.1 Add LSP Settings
Procedure 9-3
TP Function Setting to select LSP Setting. The LSP Setting window appears.
3. In the LSP Setting tabbed page, click the Add LSP tool button:
Figure 9-10 LSP Setting Window
click

4. Add LSP option window appears. Select the port mode:
Figure 9-11 Add LSP >> Step 1 Option Window
■ For No Protection Path
■ For Configuring Automatic Protection Switch Group

Table 9-3 Add LSP >> Step 1 Parameters
LSP No. (numbered To avoid entering the redundant numbers, allow the
automatically) system to enter the available number. The number is
picked in ascending order.
LSP Name (text field) Enter the LSP Name within 32 characters long.
Item MODEM Select the object from the drop-down list.
Port (available port) Select the target port from the drop-down list.
Incoming Label 16 to 524287 Enter the LSP Label value for the incoming frame. This
value should be assigned to the Outgoing Label at the
adjacent NE.
Outgoing Label 16 to 524287 Enter the LSP Label value for the outgoing frame. This
value should be assigned to the Incoming Label at the
adjacent NE.
TTL 1 to 255 Enter the Time-to-Live value that is the range to switch
back to Work side path. Entering 255 does not restrict
the range for forwarding packets.
Architecture Type Unprotected Configures no protection.
1:1 Bidirectional Select this option to configure APS Group. Selecting

this option enables the remaining options below.
Role Work Indicates that the object now you are specifying is the
Work side path.
Revertive Mode Revertive Currently Revertive is the only choice.
APS Group No. 1 to 128 Assign the APS Group number.
WTR Timer 5 to 12 Specify the value (minutes) for the wait-to-restore timer.
Hold Off Timer 0 to 10000 Specify the value (microseconds) for the hold-off timer.
5. Proceed to the following according to the choice:
 For No Protection Path
i). Click the OK button.

ii) Go to Step 6.
 For Configuring APS Group
i). Click the Next button.

ii) Add LSP >> Step 2 option window for the protection path appears.
Specify the parameters.

Figure 9-12 Add LSP >> Step 2 Option Window
LSP No. (numbered To avoid entering the redundant numbers, allow the
Item MODEM Select the object from the drop-down list.
Port (available port) Select the target port from the drop-down list.
adjacent NE.
adjacent NE.
Role Protect Indicates that the object now you are specifying is the
Protection side path.
iii) When completed, click the OK button.

7. The LSP Setting tabbed page updates the information.
Figure 9-14 MPLS-TP Function Setting — LSP Tabbed Page

9.4.1.2 Label Switched Path Setting Parameters
Following show the parameters that can or cannot be modified.
To modify the parameters that indicate “cannot be modified,” delete the LSP setting
that contain the target value, then proceed with the Add LSP steps using the new
values.
LSP No. cannot be modified ——
Item cannot be modified ——
Port cannot be modified ——
Incoming Label cannot be modified ——
Outgoing Label cannot be modified ——
TTL cannot be modified ——
Architecture Type Unprotected Configures no protection.
1:1 Bidirectional Select this option to configure APS Group. Selecting

this option enables the remaining options below.
Role Work Indicates that the object now you are specifying is the
Work side path.
Revertive Mode Revertive Currently Revertive is the only choice.
APS Group No. cannot be modified ——
WTR Timer 5 to 12 Specify the value (minutes) for the wait-to-restore timer.
Hold Off Timer 0 to 10000 Specify the value (microseconds) for the hold-off timer.
LSP No. cannot be modified ——
Item cannot be modified ——
Port cannot be modified ——
Incoming Label cannot be modified ——
Outgoing Label cannot be modified ——
TTL cannot be modified ——
Role Protect Indicates that the object now you are specifying is the
Protection side path.

9.4.1.3 Modify LSP Settings
Procedure 9-4
3. In the LSP Setting tabbed page, click the LSP No. link:
click
Modify LSP option window appears.

4. Modify parameters. Refer to Table 9-5 Add LSP >> Step 1 Parameters and
Table 9-6 Add LSP >> Step 2 Parameters also.
Figure 9-16 Modify LSP >> Step 1 (for Unprotected Path)
Figure 9-17 Modify LSP >> Step 1/2 (for Protected Path)
(Modify LSP >> Step 1) (Modify LSP >> Step 2)


7. The LSP Setting tabbed page updates the information.
Figure 9-19 MPLS-TP Function Setting — LSP Tabbed Page (1/2: on the left)
Figure 9-20 MPLS-TP Function Setting — LSP Tabbed Page (2/2: to the rightmost)

9.4.1.4 Delete LSP Settings
Procedure 9-5
3. In the LSP Setting tabbed page, click the Delete LSP tool button:
click
4. Delete LSP option window appears. Enter the LSP No. to be removed.
Figure 9-22 Delete LSP Option Window




8. LSP Setting tabbed page updates the information.

Figure 9-25 LSP Setting Window (1/2: on the left)
Figure 9-26 LSP Setting Window (1/2: to the rightmost)

9.4.2 XC Setting Tab
9.4.2.1 Add Cross Connect Setting
Procedure 9-6
3. In the XC Setting tabbed page, click the Add XC tool button:
click XC Setting tab
Add XC option window appears.

4. Enter the XC Name, then select LSP Names:
Figure 9-28 Add XC Option Window
Table 9-7 Add XC Parameters
XC No. (numbered To avoid entering the redundant numbers, allow the

XC Name (text field) Enter the XC Name within 32 characters long.
LSP Name (available LSP) Select LSP from the drop-down list for both Edge-A and
Edge-B.
Item (read only) Values here are filled in automatically according to the
LSP Name selected for Edge-A and Edge-B above.
Slot (read only)
Port (read only)
Incoming Label (read only)
Outgoing Label (read only)


7. The XC Setting tabbed page updates the information.
Figure 9-30 XC Setting Window

9.4.2.2 Delete XC Settings
Procedure 9-7
3. In the XC Setting tabbed page, click the Delete XC tool button:

click
4. Delete XC option window appears. Enter the XC No. of the target to remove.
Figure 9-32 Delete XC Option Window



8. XC Setting tabbed page updates the information.
Figure 9-35 XC Setting Tabbed Page

9.5 PW Setting
9.5.1 PW Bind Setting
9.5.1.1 Add PW Setting
Procedure 9-8
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then its submenus
MPLS-TP Function Setting and PW Setting to select PW Bind Setting. The
PW Bind Setting window appears.
3. Click the Add PW tool button:
Figure 9-36 PW Bind Setting Window
click
Add PW option window appears.

Figure 9-37 Add PW Option Window
Table 9-8 Add PW Parameters
PW No. (numbered To avoid entering the redundant numbers, allow the

PW Name (text field) Enter the PW Name within 32 characters long.
LSP Name (available LSP) Select LSP from the drop-down list.
Item (read only) Values here are filled in automatically according to the
selected LSP Name.
Slot (read only)
Port (read only)
adjacent NE.
adjacent NE.



7. PW Bind Setting window updates the information.

9.5.1.2 Modify PW Setting
The parameter that can be modified is PW Name only.
Procedure 9-9
3. Click the PW No. link:
click
Modify PW option window appears.

4. Modify PW Name.:
Figure 9-41 Modify PW Option Window


9.5.1.3 Delete PW Setting
Procedure 9-10
3. Click the Delete PW tool button:
click
4. Delete PW option window appears. Enter the PW No. of the target.
Figure 9-45 Delete PW Option Window





9.5.2 L2 Encapsulation Setting
9.5.2.1 Add L2 Encapsulation
Procedure 9-11
MPLS-TP Function Setting and PW Setting to select L2 Encapsulation
Setting. The L2 Encapsulation Setting window appears.
3. Click the Add L2 Encapsulation tool button:
Figure 9-49 L2 Encapsulation Setting Window

click
Add L2 Encapsulation option window appears.

Figure 9-50 Add L2 Encapsulation Option Window
Table 9-9 Add L2 Encapsulation Parameters
Service Name (text field) Enter the Service Name within 32 characters long.
Edge A
Item (available card) From the drop-down list, select a Card or LAG for Edge A.
Slot (available slot) From the drop-down list, select a Slot for Edge A. This option is
disabled when the selected Item above is not a Card.
Port (available port) From the drop-down list, select a Port or ETH/Radio GRP for
Edge A.
VLAN ID (text field) This option is disabled when a Port parameter above is selected.
Edge B
PW Name (available PW Name) From the drop-down list, select a PW Name for Edge B.

L2 Encapsulation Setting window updates the information.


9.5.2.2 Delete L2 Encapsulation Setting
Procedure 9-12
MPLS-TP Function Setting and PW Setting to select L2 Encapsulation
Setting. The L2 Encapsulation Setting window appears.
3. Click Delete L2 Encapsulation tool button:
click
Delete L2 Encapsulation option window appears.

4. Leave a tick in the check box of the object to delete, then click OK button.
Figure 9-54 Delete L2 Encapsulation Option Window


7. L2 Encapsulation Setting window updates the information.


9.6 MPLS-TP OAM Setting

When the selected Equipment Mode is VLAN (4.2 Set Equipment Mode), this
option is disabled.
 OAM: Operation, Administration & Maintenance

 MEG: Maintenance Entity Group
 MEP: MEG End Point
 MIP: MEG Intermediate Point
9.6.1 OAM MEG Tab
9.6.1.1 Add OAM MEG

Procedure 9-13
TP Function Setting to select MPLS-TP OAM Setting. The MPLS-TP OAM
3. In the OAM MEG tabbed page, click the Add MEG tool button.
Figure 9-58 MPLS-TP OAM Setting Window — OAM MEG Tab
Add MEG tool button


Figure 9-59 OAM MEG Setting (Add) Option Window
MEG Index 1 to 128 Available index number is automatically filled in. To

avoid entering the redundant numbers, allow the
system to enter the available number. The number is
Unique MEG ID Code (text field) Enter the MEG ID Code. The valid value is 7 to 10
characters long.
CCM Enable Enable to output/monitor Continuity Check Message.
Disable Disable to output/monitor Continuity Check Message.
CC Period 3.3 [ms] Set the period of CC (Continuity Check) Message that
is used to detect the failure on the communication
10 [ms] paths.
100 [ms] To operate the Linear Protection Switching by a period

of 50 ms or shorter, set 3.3 [ms] for this option.
1 [s]
10 [s]
60 [s]
CCM Priority 0 to 7 Specify the priority of the Continuity Check Message
TTL 1 to 255 Specify the Time-to- Live value.


The MPLS-TP OAM Setting window updates the information.


9.6.1.2 Modify MEG Index
Procedure 9-14
3. In the OAM MEG tabbed page, click the link of MEG Index number.
click
OAM MEG Setting (Modify) option window appears.


Figure 9-63 OAM MEG Setting (Modify) Option Window
Table 9-60 OAM MEG Setting (Modify) Parameters
CCM Enable Enable to output/monitor CCM.
Disable Disable to output/monitor CCM.
CC Period 3.3 [ms] Modify the period of CC (Continuity Check) Message.
10 [ms] To operate the Linear Protection Switching by a period

of 50 ms or shorter, set 3.3 [ms] for this option.
100 [ms]
1 [s]
10 [s]
60 [s]
CCM Priority 0 to 7 Modify the priority of the CCM
TTL 1 to 255 Modify the Time-to- Live value.




9.6.1.3 Delete MEG Index
Procedure 9-15
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MPLS-TP
Function Setting to select MPLS-TP OAM Setting. The MPLS-TP OAM
3. In the OAM MEG tabbed page, then click the Delete MEG tool button.
click
OAM MEG Setting (Delete) option window appears.

4. Enter the MEG Index number of the target to remove, then click the OK
button.
Figure 9-67 OAM MEG Setting (Delete) Option Window


7. The MPLS-TP OAM Setting window updates the information. Confirm that the
target OAM MEG has been removed.

9.6.2 OAM MEP Tab
9.6.2.1 Add MEP Index
Procedure 9-16
3. In the OAM MEP tabbed page, click the Add MEP button.
Figure 9-71 MPLS-TP OAM Setting Window — OAM MEP Tab
Add Index tool button
OAM MEP Setting (Add) option window appears.

4. Add Peer MEP ID first:

i) Enable radio buttons ii) Add Peer MEP button
i) From the list in the MEG Configuration option box, click the Enable radio
button of the target to select.
ii) Click Add Peer MEP button in the Peer MEP Configuration option box.
iii) The Peer MEP Add option window appears. Enter the Peer MEP ID to add.
Figure 9-73 Peer MEP Add Option Box
Table 9-61 Peer MEP Add Option Parameters
Peer MEP ID 1 to 8191 Assign MEP ID of the peer equipment

iv) Click the OK button. The Peer MEP Configuration option box updates the
entries.
5. Specify the remaining parameters in the OAM MEP Setting (Add) option
window:
Table 9-62 OAM MEP Setting (Add) Parameters (1/2)
MEP Configuration
Direction (read only) Direction of service from Line to L2SW. (Not editable.)
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an MPLS-TP OAM Message with an LSP.

Table 9-62 OAM MEP Setting (Add) Parameters (2/2)
MEG Configuration
Configuration.
6. When completed, click the OK button. Confirmation dialog box appears.


9. Confirm that the newly added MEP Index information is displayed.

Figure 9-77 MPLS OAM Setting Window — OAM MEP Tab

9.6.2.2 Modify MEP Index
Procedure 9-17
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MPLS-TP
Function Setting to select MPLS-TP OAM Setting. The MPLS-TP OAM
3. In the OAM MEP tabbed page, click the MEP Index number of the target to
modify.
click
OAM MEP Setting (Modify) option window appears.


Figure 9-79 OAM MEP Setting (Modify) Option Window
Table 9-63 OAM MEP Index Parameters

MEP Configuration
Direction (read only) Direction of service from Line to L2SW. (Not editable.)
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an MPLS-TP OAM Message with an LSP.
MEG Configuration

Configuration.



modified parameter(s) is/are displayed.

9.6.2.3 Delete MEP Index
Procedure 9-18
3. In the OAM MEP tabbed page, click the Delete MEP button of the target to be
removed.
OAM MEP tab

Delete MEP tool button
OAM MEP Setting (Delete) option window appears.

4. Select an MEP Index number of the target to be removed.

Figure 9-84 OAM MEP Setting (Delete) Option Window


8. Confirm that the target OAM MEP Index has been removed.

9.6.3 OAM MIP Tab
9.6.3.1 Add MIP Index
Procedure 9-19
3. In the OAM MIP tabbed page, click the Add MIP tool button.
Figure 9-88 MPLS-TP OAM Setting Window — OAM MIP Tab
Add MIP tool button OAM MIP tab
OAM MIP Setting (Add) option window appears.


Figure 9-89 OAM MIP Setting (Add) Option Window
Table 9-64 OAM MIP Setting Parameter
MIP Configuration
Enable (check box) Tick (click to leave a tick in) a check box to associate
an LSP.
When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. MPLS-TP OAM Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.

9.6.3.2 Modify MIP Index
Procedure 9-20 Modify OAM MIP Index
3. In the OAM MIP tabbed page, click on the MIP Index number of the target.
OAM MIP tab

MIP Index
OAM MIP Setting (Modify) option window appears.

4. Modify the parameter(s):

Figure 9-93 OAM MIP Setting (Modify) Option Window
MIP Configuration
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an LSP.


information of modified parameter(s) is displayed.

9.6.3.3 Delete MIP Index
Procedure 9-21
3. In the OAM MIP tabbed page, click on the Delete MIP tool button.
OAM MIP tab

Delete MIP tool button
4. OAM MIP Setting (Delete) option window appears. Select the MIP Index
number of the target, then click the OK button.
Figure 9-97 OAM MIP Setting (Delete) Option Window



target OAM MIP Index has been removed.

9.7 Linear Protection Setting
9.7.1 Add APS GRP
Procedure 9-22
TP Function Setting to select Linear Protection Setting.
3. The Linear Protection Setting window appears. Click the Add APS GRP tool
button.
Figure 9-101 Linear Protection Setting Window
Add APS GRP tool button
ADD APS GRP option window appears.


Figure 9-102 Add APS GRP Option Window
Table 9-10 Add APS GRP Parameters
APS GRP No. (numbered To avoid entering the redundant numbers, allow the system
automatically) to enter the available number. The number is picked in
ascending order.
APS GRP Name (text field) Enter the APS GRP Name within 32 characters long.
Work LSP / Protect LSP (Specify LSP for both Work and Protection sides)
LSP Name (available LSP) Select the LSP Name from the drop-down list.
MEP ID (read only) Automatically filled in according to the selected LSP Name.
MEG Index (read only) Automatically filled in according to the selected LSP Name.
Architecture Type 1:1 Bidirectional Indicates the 1:1 Bidirectional (fixed value).
Revertive Mode Revertive Indicates Revertive (fixed value).
WTR Timer 5 to 12 Enter the wait-to-restore timer value. [unit: minute]
Hold OffTimer 0 to 10000 Enter the hold-off timer value. [unit: millisecond]
Control Frame Priority 0 to 7 Specify the priority number to the control frame.
Control Frame TTL 0 to 255 Specify the TTL value.


7. The Linear Protection Setting window updates the information. Verify the
Figure 9-104 Linear Protection Setting Window (1/2: on the left)
Figure 9-105 Linear Protection Setting Window (2/2: to the rightmost)

9.7.2 Modify APS GRP
Procedure 9-23
3. The Linear Protection Setting window appears. Click the link of APS GRP
No.
click
Edit APS GRP option window appears.


Figure 9-107 Edit APS GRP Option Window
Table 9-11 Edit APS GRP Parameters
APS GRP No. (read only) Cannot be modified.
APS GRP Name (text field) Modify the APS GRP Name within 32 characters long.
Work LSP / Protect LSP (read only) Cannot be modified.
Architecture Type (read only) Cannot be modified.
Revertive Mode (read only) Cannot be modified.
WTR Timer 5 to 12 Modify the wait-to-restore timer value. [unit: minute]
Hold OffTimer 0 to 10000 Modify the hold-off timer value. [unit: millisecond]
Control Frame Priority 0 to 7 Modify the priority number to the control frame.
Control Frame TTL 0 to 255 Modify the TTL value.



(rightmost)

9.7.3 Delete APS GRP
Procedure 9-24
3. The Linear Protection Setting window appears. Click the Delete APS GRP
tool button.
Delete APS GRP tool button
4. Delete APS GRP option window appears. Specify the APS GRP number to
remove:
Figure 9-112 Delete APS GRP Option Window

9-76/END Set MPLS-TP Function


Set Cross Connection Using E1/STM-1 Port 10-1
10. Set Cross Connection Using E1/STM-1 Port
10.1 Overview
iPASOLINK supports the crossconnection configured using E1 Ports and STM-1
Ports. The E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Setting menu provides the following options:
Cross Connect Setting

Configures the Cross Connect, and confirms the current usage of Cross Connect
and Ports (CH).
E1 Port Setting

Sets E1 Port by specifying E1 Port Name, E1 CH Usage, Channel Impedance and
unused CH reports.
STM-1 Port Setting

Sets STM-1 Port by specifying STM-1 Port Mode, Usage, TIM ALM and ALS
(Automatic Laser Shutdown).

10-2 Set Cross Connection Using E1/STM-1 Port
10.2 Cross Connect Setting
10.2.1 Reference
iPASOLINK VR supports the Crossconnection of 2M E1 and STM-1 (Through

Mode) levels. Following lists the interface cards that support the Cross Connections:
Table 10-1 Crossconnect Settings
Function Card Type Number of Number of Descriptions

Ports per Card Cards per IDU
E1 CH On-Board MODEM 152 —— 152 at a maximum
MODEM-EA 152 Up to 3 456 at a maximum
MODEM-AV 152 Up to 2 304 at a maximum
On-Board E1 16 —— 16 at maximum
16E1-A 16 Up to 3 48 at maximum
STM1-A 63 Up to 3 189 at maximum
MSE-A 64 1 64 at maximum
STM-1 CH On-Board MODEM 2 —— 2 at maximum
MODEM-EA 2 Up to 3 6 at maximum
MODEM-AV 2 Up to 2 4 at a maximum
STM1-A 2 Up to 3 6 at maximum
E1 CH 2-Way Up to 388 per IDU (by MODEM-A/EA)

MODEM-A/EA: [5 × MODEM (152 CH) + 2 × E1 (16 CH)]  2
MODEM-AV: [4 × MODEM (152 CH) + 2 × E1 (16 CH))]  2
 A pair of SNCP ports, regardless of one or both of the ports using the restricted
slot(s), will be counted as one channel out of 336 channels.
See the following table for channel numbering of the Channelized STM-1:

Table 10-2 Channel Numbering of Channelized STM-1
STM-1 TUG-3 TUG-2 TU-12 NEO STM-1 TUG-3 TUG-2 TU-12 NEO
Channelized Extension Channelized Extension
Port No. #K #L #M Port No. Port No. #K #L #M Port No.
1 1 1 1 1 34 1 5 2 14
2 2 1 1 22 35 2 5 2 35
3 3 1 1 43 36 3 5 2 56
4 1 2 1 4 37 1 6 2 17
5 2 2 1 25 38 2 6 2 38
6 3 2 1 46 39 3 6 2 59
7 1 3 1 7 40 1 7 2 20
8 2 3 1 28 41 2 7 2 41
9 3 3 1 49 42 3 7 2 62
10 1 4 1 10 43 1 1 3 3
11 2 4 1 31 44 2 1 3 24
12 3 4 1 52 45 3 1 3 45
13 1 5 1 13 46 1 2 3 6
14 2 5 1 34 47 2 2 3 27
15 3 5 1 55 48 3 2 3 48
16 1 6 1 16 49 1 3 3 9
17 2 6 1 37 50 2 3 3 30
18 3 6 1 58 51 3 3 3 51
19 1 7 1 19 52 1 4 3 12
20 2 7 1 40 53 2 4 3 33
21 3 7 1 61 54 3 4 3 54
22 1 1 2 2 55 1 5 3 15
23 2 1 2 23 56 2 5 3 36
24 3 1 2 44 57 3 5 3 57
25 1 2 2 5 58 1 6 3 18
26 2 2 2 26 59 2 6 3 39
27 3 2 2 47 60 3 6 3 60
28 1 3 2 8 61 1 7 3 21
29 2 3 2 29 62 2 7 3 42
30 3 3 2 50 63 3 7 3 63
31 1 4 2 11
32 2 4 2 32 ———
33 3 4 2 53

10.2.2 Add Cross Connect Assignment
Procedure 10-1
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then its submenu E1/
STM-1/Cross Connect Setting to select Cross Connect Setting. The Cross
Connect Setting window appears.
3. Click the Add tool button to create a new Cross Connection:
Figure 10-1 Cross Connect Setting Window
Add button
 To display all the registered information, if exists, leave the Service No. field in
the Filter option box blank, then click the Search button.
NOTE: The Service No. entry field in the Filter option box indicates 1-20 by default,
which is only to limit the number of registered crossconnections to display in
the beginning. Entering a specific number or a range (e.g., 1000-2352 for
crossconnections of Service No. 1000 to 2352) retrieves the information of
the Service No. as entered. To display all, remove the entry to leave the field
blank, and click the Search button.
4. Cross Connect Setting (Add) option window appears. Assign the appropriate
value to each parameter:

Figure 10-2 Cross Connect Setting (Add) Option Window
NOTE: Port numbers of Edge A/B appear different depending on the channel
spacing.
Table 10-3 Cross Connect Setting (Add) Parameters

Service No. 1 to 2352 Enter a Service Number of the Cross Connection.
Service Name (text field) Enter the Service Name within 32 characters long. This field can be
left vacant (0 character) as well.
Cross Connect Type E1 Selects the crossconnection of E1 level.
STM-1 (Through) Selects the crossconnection of STM-1 Through level.
Edge.A, Edge.B
Protection (check box) This option is enabled when the Cross Connect Type is E1.
 Leave a tick in the check box to configure the Protection. Ticking
this box enables the option box below.
 Remove a tick from the check box to disable the Protection option.
(drop-down list) (available slot) Select a port for Edge A, Term1/Term2. NOTE
Port/CH (KLML/CH) (check box) Indicates available ports/channels. [Blue: Selected object by
clicking; Gray: Used object; White: Unsettled, unused object]
Name (available port)
AMR Linkage (hyperlink) Opens AMR Detail lists to verify the channel number and
militarization related to the current assignment. This option is
enabled only for MODEM whose AMR is on.

6. Click the OK button to proceed:

7. The Cross Connect Setting window updates the information. Verify the
 Entering a number or range in Service No. field of Filter option box can trim the
list.

10.2.3 Modify (Edit) Cross Connect Assignment
Procedure 10-2
STM-1/Cross Connect Setting to select Cross Connect Setting. The Cross
Connect Setting window appears.
 Entering a number/range in Service No. field of Filter option box trims the list.
 Leaving the Service No. entry field blank displays the full list.
3. Click the Service No. of the target Cross Connect.
Service Numbers
Cross Connect Setting (Modify) option window appears.

Figure 10-6 Cross Connect Setting (Modify) Option Window
Table 10-4 Cross Connect Setting (Modify) Parameters

Service No. (read only) Indicates the selected Service No.
Service Name (text field) Service Name can be modified. Valid value is within 32 characters
long. This field can be left vacant (0 character) as well.
Cross Connect Type E1 Selects the crossconnection of E1 level.
STM-1 (Through) Selects the crossconnection of STM-1 Through level.
Edge.A, Edge.B
Protection (check box) This option is enabled when the Cross Connect Type is E1.
 Leave a tick in the check box to configure the Protection. Ticking
this box enables the option box below.
 Remove a tick from the check box to disable the Protection option.
(drop-down list) (available slot) Select a port for Edge A, Term1/Term2. NOTE
Port/CH (KLML/CH) (check box) Indicates available ports/channels. [Blue: Selected object by
clicking; Gray: Used object; White: Unsettled, unused object]
Name (available port)
AMR Linkage (hyperlink) Opens AMR Detail lists to verify the channel number and
militarization related to the current assignment. This option is
enabled only for MODEM whose AMR is on.

NOTE: Port numbers of Edge A/B appear different depending on the channel
spacing.

7. The Cross Connect Setting window updates the information. Verify the

10.2.4 Delete Cross Connect Assignment
Procedure 10-3
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand E1/STM-1/
Cross Connect Setting to select Cross Connect Setting. The Cross Connect
3. Click the Delete button:

Delete tool button
Cross Connect Setting (Delete) option window appears.

4. Tick (click to leave a tick in) the check box of the target crossconnection.
Ticking the check box on the title bar selects all.
Figure 10-10 Cross Connect Setting (Delete) Option Window
NOTE: The Service No. entry field in the Filter option box indicates 1-20 by default,
in order to limit the number of registered crossconnections to display in the
beginning.



The Cross Connect Setting window updates the information.


10.3 E1 Port Setting

Procedure 10-4
STM-1/Cross Connect Setting to select E1 Port Setting. The E1 Port Setting
window appears.

Figure 10-14 Cross Connect Setting Port Setting Window
Modify tool button
The E1 Port Setting option window appears.


Figure 10-15 E1 Port Setting (Modify) Option Window
Table 10-5 E1 Port Setting Parameters (1 of 2)

Collective Setting: This option sets all ports to the same values. To set ports individually, use the options below
the Collective Setting options.
CH Usage Used All All E1 Channels are set to be used.
Not Used All All E1 Channels are set to be unused.
CH Usage Report All Allows to report a usage error if an unused E1 CH is detected at the
Error Report input signal.
Not Report All Disables to report a usage error for all E1 ports.
Impedance All CH 120 Sets the impedance of all E1 Channels to 120 ohms.
All CH 75 Sets the impedance of all E1 Channels to 75 ohms.
CH Usage Used Sets to use the port.

Not Used Sets not to use the port.
CH Usage Error Report Enables to report the usage error if detecting an unused port.
Report
Not Report Disables to report a usage error.

Table 10-5 E1 Port Setting Parameters (2 of 2)

Impedance 120 Sets the port impedance to 120 ohms.
75 Sets the port impedance to 75 ohms.

Port Name (text field) Specifies a name to the port. Valid value is 0 to 32 characters long.

7. The E1 Port Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.
Figure 10-17 E1 Port Setting Window

10.4 STM-1 Port Setting

Procedure 10-5
STM-1/Cross Connect Setting to select STM-1 Port Setting. The STM-1 Port

Figure 10-18 STM-1 Port Setting Window
Modify tool button
STM-1 Port Setting option window appears. Provided options differ

depending on the STM-1 Mode. STM-1 Modes are Through and
Channelized:
 Through: The Through Mode transmits the STM-1 over the radio frame.
 Channelized: The Channelized Mode extracts the 63 E1 channels from the
STM-1 to use them selectively.

STM-1 Mode: Through

Figure 10-19 STM-1 Port Setting Option Window
(example: STM-1 Through; configuring APS, using Same Card)

Table 10-6 STM-1 Port Setting (Through Mode) Parameters
STM-1 Mode Through Indicates Through for STM-1 Mode.
Port Setting (For STM-1 configuring APS by Same Card disables Port02 settings.)
Port Usage Used Sets to use the STM-1 Port.
Not Used Sets not to use the STM-1 Port.
Port Name (text filed) Specifies the Port Name using at least one, up to 32 characters
long.
MS-AIS Generation Enable Enables the function to stop laser outputs if detecting that STM-1
signal is lost (optical or radio) (RLOS), and to output MS-AIS. (For
STM-1 configuring APS by Same Card disables Port02 settings.)
Disable Disables this function.
ALS Usage Enable Enables the ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) function.
Disable Disables the ALS function.
ALS Interval 60 [s] Sets the delay time to release the port from the ALS state when
the alarm is cleared. [unit: second]
180 [s]
300 [s]
STM-1 Switch Setting (This option appears when configuring APS.)
Lock-in Usage Used Enables to pause for a period of time before carrying out a
switching operation to prevent frequently executing the switching.
Not Used Disables this function.
Detection Time [min] 1 to 60 Sets the Lock-in period between the detection of a failure and
execution of the switch operation. [unit: minute]
Detection Count [times] 1 to 255 Sets the threshold value to number of switch-over times.
Clear Lock-in Time [min] 1 to 2880 Sets the duration period before clearing the Lock-in mode.

STM-1 Mode: Channelized

Figure 10-20 STM-1 Port Setting Window
(example: STM-1 Channelized; configuring APS)

Table 10-7 STM-1 Port Setting (Channelized Mode) Parameters (1 of 2)
STM-1 Mode Channelized Indicates Channelized for STM-1 Mode.
Port Setting
Port Usage Used Sets to use the STM-1 Port.
Not Used Sets not to use the STM-1 Port.
Port Name (text filed) Specifies the Port Name using at least one, up to 32
characters long.
MS-AIS Generation Enable This option is not editable. The option is set to enable
stopping laser outputs if detecting that STM-1 signal is lost
(optical or radio) (RLOS), and outputting MS-AIS. This option
is currently not editable.
ALS Usage Enable Enables the ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) function.
Disable Disables the ALS function.
ALS Interval 60sec Sets the delay time to release the port from the ALS state
when the alarm is cleared.
180sec
300sec
Trace Setting
Trace Mode J0: Section Trace Enables to detect RS-TIM.
J1: High Order Enables to detect HP-TIM.

Path Trace
Trace Mismatch AIS Enable Enables the function to output AIS if detecting TIM.
Generation Action
Disable Disables this function.
Section Trace Send 1 to 15 Sets J0 in the outgoing direction. Enabled when Trace Mode
is J0: Section Trace.
Expected Section Trace 1 to 15 Sets J0 in the incoming direction. Enabled when Trace Mode
is J0: Section Trace.
Higher Order Path 1 to 15 Sets J1 in the outgoing direction. Enabled when Trace Mode
Trace is J1: HIgher Order Path Trace.
Expected Higher Order 1 to 15 Sets J1 in the incoming direction. Enabled when Trace Mode
Path Trace is J1: HIgher Order Path Trace.
Received Trace Value
Received Section Trace (read only) Indicates the received Section Trace value.
Received High Order (read only) Indicates the received Higher-Order Path Trace value.
Path Trace

Table 10-7 STM-1 Port Setting (Channelized Mode) Parameters (2 of 2)
Radio Alarm Transfer Setting
Radio Alarm Transfer Enable Enables to transfer an alarm through E1 Channel with STM-1
is configured as Channelized.
Disable Disables the function.
STM-1 Switch Setting (This option appears when configuring APS.)
Lock-in Usage Used Enables to pause for a period of time before carrying out a
switching operation to prevent frequently executing the
switching.
Not Used Disables this function.
Detection Time [min] 1 to 60 Sets the Lock-in period between the detection of a failure and
execution of the switch operation. [unit: minute]
Detection Count [times] 1 to 255 Sets the threshold value to number of switch-over times.
Clear Lock-in Time [min] 1 to 2880 Sets the duration period before clearing the Lock-in mode.

The STM-1 Port Setting window updates the information.

10-22/END Set Cross Connection Using E1/STM-1 Port

Figure 10-22 STM-1 Port Setting Window (example: Channelized)

Set PWE Function 11-1
11. Set PWE Function
Following specifies the TDM PWE (SAToP) function:
11.1 Add New PWE

Procedure 11-1
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning to select PWE Setting.
The PWE Setting window appears.
3. Click the Add PWE tool button to display Step 1 PWE Setting option window:
Figure 11-1 PWE Setting Window
Add PWE tool button

11-2 Set PWE Function
Figure 11-2 Step 1 PWE Setting Option Window and Detail Option Window
click
Table 11-1 Step 1 PWE Setting Parameters
PWE No. 1 to 256 Assign the service number of PWE. Up to 64 PWE Numbers can be
registered using 1 to 256 digits.
PWE Service (text field) Enter the service name of PWE. Valid value is 0 to 32 characters long (the
Name field can be left blank).
PWE Mode TDMoETH Currently TDMoETH is the only choice.
PWE Type SAToP Currently SAToP is the only choice.

E1 Line Mode / CLK Mode
MSE E1 CH CH01 to CH64 Select E1 Cross Connect CH.
PCM Codec Unframed Currently Unframed is the only choice.
CRC Disable Currently Disable is the only choice.
Jitter Buffer 2 [ms] Set the Jitter Buffer size.

4 [ms] e.g., Select 8 [ms] for ±4 ms Jitter Buffer.
8 [ms]
16 [ms]
32 [ms]
64 [ms]
128 [ms]
Clock Mode NE Clock (available for MSE E1 CH01 to CH64) Select a source clock for
TDM synchronization. See
ACR (available for MSE E1 CH01 to CH16) Figure 11-3 below.
ACR Slave (available for MSE E1 CH17 to CH64)
Sync E1 (available for MSE E1 CH01 to CH64)
Assign CH CH01 to CH16 Options appears for number of registered ACR from CH01. Enabled when
the ACR Slave is selected.
Figure 11-3 Clock Mode Selection
<MSE E1 CH 1 to CH16>
NE Clock (from System)
Sync E1
(recovered clock of E1 Port, loop timing) Synchronous Source Clock of PWE
ACR
(from iPASOLINK on destination end)
Clock Mode
<MSE E1 CH 17 to CH64>
NE Clock (from System)
Sync E1
(recovered clock of E1 Port, loop timing) Synchronous Source Clock of PWE
ACR CH1
ACR CH2
Clock Mode
ACR CH16
Assign CH

5. Clicking the Detail Option tool button opens the Detail Option window:
Table 11-2 PWE Detail Option Parameters
Capsule E1 Frame Size 1 to 8 Specifies E1 frame size.
1 to 7 Specifies E1 frame size for the congestion controlled network.
RTP Header On Enables the Option RTP Header addition.
Off Disables the Option RTP Header addition.
6. Click the OK button. The Detail Option window disappears.

7. Click the Next button on the Step 1 PWE Setting option window. Step 2 Select
VLAN ID option window appears.
8. Specify/Modify parameters:
NOTE: To add VLAN ID, click the Add VLAN ID tool button, then go to
8.4 VLAN Setting.
Figure 11-4 Step 2 Select VLAN ID Option Window
Add VLAN ID tool button

Table 11-3 Step2 Select VLAN Parameters
CoS 0 to 7 CoS valued of PWE.
ECID 1 to 1048575 Specify the ID of PWE.
Destination MAC Address (text field) Enter the MAC Address of destination MSE-A (display to
ff.ff.ff.ff.ff.ff PWE Setting window) or Broadcast Address.
Source MAC Address (read only)) Indicates the Source MAC address of the target.
Enable (radio button) Click the radio button to select a VLAN.
VLAN ID (read only) Shows the contents of registered VLANs.
VLAN Service Name (read only)
9. Click the Next button. Step 3 Setting Confirmation Screen option window
appears.
10. Confirm the displayed parameters.
Figure 11-5 Step 3 Setting Confirmation Screen Option Window

11. Click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

12. The PWE Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.
(left end)
(right end)
13. Add Cross Connect between E1 CH and MSE-A E1 CH by referring to 10.

Set Cross Connection Using E1/STM-1 Port. This step ends the procedure.

11.2 Modify PWE

Procedure 11-2
3. Click the PWE No. link of the target object:
PWE No.
4. Step 1 PWE Setting option window appears. Modify parameters:

Figure 11-9 Step 1 PWE Setting Option Window

PWE No. (read only) Indicates the selected PWE No.
PWE Service (text field) The service name of PWE can be modified. Valid value is 0 to
Name 32 characters long (the field can be left blank).
PWE Mode TDMoETH Currently TDMoETH is the only choice.
PWE Type SAToP Currently SAToP is the only choice.
E1 Line Mode / CLK Mode
MSE E1 CH (read only) This parameter cannot be modified.
PCM Codec Unframed Currently Unframed is the only choice.
CRC Disable Currently Disable is the only choice.
Jitter Buffer 2 [ms] Modify the Jitter Buffer size.

4 [ms] e.g., Select 8 [ms] for ±4 ms Jitter Buffer.
8 [ms]
16 [ms]
32 [ms]
64 [ms]
128 [ms]
Clock Mode NE Clock (available for MSE E1 CH01 to CH64) change a source clock
for TDM
ACR (available for MSE E1 CH01 to CH16) synchronization. See
<Arial_9XRi>Figure
ACR Slave (available for MSE E1 CH17 to CH64) 11-3 below.
Sync E1 (available for MSE E1 CH01 to CH64)
Assign CH CH01 to CH16 Options appears for number of registered ACR from CH01.
Enabled when the ACR Slave is selected.
5. When completed, click the Next button to open Step 2 Select VLAN ID option
window.


Figure 11-10 Step 2 Select VLAN ID Option Window
Table 11-5 Step2 Select VLAN Parameters
CoS 0 to 7 CoS valued of PWE.
ECID 1 to 1048575 Specify the ID of PWE.
Destination MAC Address (text field) Enter the MAC Address of destination MSE-A (display to
ff.ff.ff.ff.ff.ff PWE Setting window) or Broadcast Address.
Source MAC Address (read only)) Indicates the Source MAC address of the target.
Enable (radio button) Click the radio button to select a VLAN.
VLAN ID (read only) Shows the contents of registered VLANs.
VLAN Service Name (read only)
7. When completed, click the Next button. Step 3 Setting Confirmation Screen
option window appears.

8. Verify the displayed information, then click the OK button.

Figure 11-11 Step 3 Setting Confirmation Screen Option Window

The PWE Setting window updates the information.


Figure 11-13 PSW Setting Window (1/2: on the left)
Figure 11-14 PSW Setting Window (2/2: to the right)

11.3 Delete PWE

Procedure 11-3
3. Click the Delete PWE tool button.
Delete PWE button
Delete PWE option window appears.

4. Tick (click to leave a tick in) the check box of the target PWE. Ticking a check
box on top selects all.
Figure 11-16 Delete PWE Option Window
click

While in progress, the progress bar appears.

Figure 11-18 Progress Bar

11-14/END Set PWE Function
7. When completed, Information dialog box appears.

8. The PWE Setting window updates the information.

Figure 11-20 PSW Setting Window
(left end)
(right end)
9. Delete Cross connect between E1 CH and MSE-A E1 CH. Refer to 10. Set
Cross Connection Using E1/STM-1 Port.

Set Equipment Clock and Synchronization 12-1
12. Set Equipment Clock and Synchronization
12.1 Overview
The procedures here sets the Internal/External Clock, the Timing Source Selection,
and PTP usage of the equipment. This operation menu provides the following:
Equipment Clock Setting

Selects the Clock and Timing Source.
EXT Clock Setting

Sets the CLK Output parameters.
PTP Mode Setting

Specifies the PTP Mode, Transport Mode, etc. This function is currently not
supported.
PTP Domain Setting

Specifies the PTP Master Settings.

12-2 Set Equipment Clock and Synchronization
12.2 Equipment Clock Setting
12.2.1 Specify/Modify Equipment Clock Setting
Procedure 12-1
Equipment Clock/Synchronization Setting to select Equipment Clock
Setting. The Equipment Clock Setting window appears.
Figure 12-1 Equipment Clock Setting Window
Modify tool button
Equipment Clock Setting option window appears.

Figure 12-2 Equipment Clock Setting Option Window
Table 12-1 Equipment Clock Setting Parameters (1 of 2)
Equipment CLK Master Sets the equipment clock as the Master Clock to provide timing
Mode signals to synchronize Slave Clocks.
Slave Sets the equipment clock as a Slave Clock to be synchronized

with the Master Clock. Selecting Slave enables the option box
below and WTR Time option.
Clock Source QL Mode Sets to select the clock source by its quality level (SSM). If the
Selective Mode quality values are the same, priority values are used to
compare.
PL Mode Sets to select the clock source by its priority level, signal fail, or
an external command.
Timing Source No Entry Select a clock source.
EXT CLK (*) should indicate the registered card names.

GbE Line CLK can be selected for only one of SFP Ports on
Line CLK (*) Main Card.
GbE Line CLK PTP Line CLK is not available when the PTP Profile selects
G.8275.1 (see 12.4 PTP Mode Setting).
PTP Line CLK
NOTE: Adding SyncETH to the Timing Source may cause a
link down momentarily on the relevant ports.
Slot (available slot #) Select a Slot number of the target object.
Port / CH (available port #) Select a Port number of the target that can extract the clock
information.
Priority Level 1 to 12 Sets the priority of the timing source manually.

Table 12-1 Equipment Clock Setting Parameters (2 of 2)
SSM Usage Use Sets to use the Line SSM.
Not Used Sets not to use the Line SSM.
Forced SSM Value QL-PRC Selects the clock quality of the line. Regardless of the SSM
QL-SSU-A Usage setting, the selected value is treated as the clock
QL-SSU-B quality:
QL-SEC
Overwrite
Quality Level Quality
SSM Code
QL-PRC HIGH 0010
QL-SSU-A : 0100
QL-SSU-B : 1000
QL-SEC LOW 1011
WTR Timer 0 [s] Sets the Wait to Restore time that is a period to wait for
enabling the timing source when recovered.
10 [s]
20 [s]
30 [s]
1 [min] to 15 [min]
(by a minute)
then click the OK button of the dialog box.
6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box to
proceed.
The Equipment Clock Setting window updates the information.


Figure 12-5 Equipment Clock Setting Window
(left end)
(right end)

12.3 EXT Clock Setting
12.3.1 Specify/Modify EXT Clock Setting
Procedure 12-2
Equipment Clock/Synchronization Setting to select Ext Clock Setting. The
Ext Clock Setting window appears.

Figure 12-6 Ext Clock Setting Window
Modify tool button
Ext Clock Setting option window appears.


Figure 12-7 Ext Clock Setting Option Window
Table 12-2 Ext Clock Setting Parameters (1 of 2)
In / Out
EXT Impedance 120 Selects the impedance of EXT CLK.
75
EXT CLK Interface bps Selects EXT CLK by bit/s or Hertz. Selecting bps enables
the CRC On/Off option below.
Hz
CRC On/Off On Enables the Ext Clock CRC check.
Off Disables the Ext Clock CRC check.
SSM Support Enable Supports SSM.
Disable Disables SSM usage.
Sa Bit Sa4 to Sa8 Sets SSM bit of input/output Ext Clock.

Table 12-2 Ext Clock Setting Parameters (2 of 2)
Out - EXT CLK
EXT CLK Out SEL Not Select Select a CLK type.

(*) should indicate the registered card names.
NE CLK
 Selecting Not Select disables CLK outputs.
Line CLK (*)  Selecting Line (MODEM) enables the Timing Loop
Prevention option below.
GbE Line CLK1
GbE Line CLK2
PTP Line CLK
Slot (available Slot #) Select a Slot number of the target object.
Port/CH (available Port/CH #) Select a Port or CH number.
Message Pass On Uses SSM Message Pass Through mode.

Through
Off Not to use SSM Message Pass Through mode. Selecting
Off enables Forced SSM Send Value option below.
Forced SSM Send QL-PRC Selects Primary Reference Clock.

Value
QL-SSUA Selects Synchronization Supply Unit A.
QL-SSUB Selects Synchronization Supply Unit B.
QL-SEC Selects SDH Equipment Clock.
QL-DNU Selects Do Not Use.
Threshold AIS Off This option is not supported.

Generation Mode
QL Threshold —— This option is not supported.
AIS Generation AIS Selects to generate AIS or to shut down the clock
Mode configuration if the output clock source fails.
Shutdown
Timing Loop On Enables the timing loop detection.

Prevention
Off Disables the timing loop detection.
NOTE: Port/CH numbers cannot be changed when the same interface is already
used by the equipment clock setting.
proceed.

7. The Ext Clock Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.
Figure 12-9 Ext Clock Setting Window

12.4 PTP Mode Setting

NOTE: For the system where the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, this option is
12.4.1 Modify PTP Mode
Procedure 12-3
Equipment Clock/Synchronization Setting to select PTP Mode Setting. The
PTP Mode Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify PTP Mode tool button:

Figure 12-10 PTP Mode Setting Window
Modify PTP Mode tool button
Step 1 PTP Mode Setting option window appears.


Figure 12-11 Step 1 PTP Mode Setting Option Window
Table 12-3 PTP Mode Setting Parameters (1 of 2)
PTP Mode Boundary Clock (BC) Enables the PTP Mode using Boundary Clock (BC).
 Either TC (Transparent Clock) or BC function, but not both,
can be enabled.
 Selecting this option requires the PTP Profile and Multicast
Type options below.
Slave Only Ordinary Enables the PTP Mode using the ordinary clock on Slave side.
Clock (SOOC)
 SOOC uses the designated settings for the remaining
options (no need to set manually).
Transparent Clock (TC) Enables the PTP Mode using Transparent Clock (TC).
 Selecting this option requires the PTP Profile and Multicast
Type settings below.
Disable Disables the PTP Mode.
PTP Profile IEEE 1588v2 PTP Boundary Clock or Transparent Clock operates in
compliance with IEEE 1588v2 profile.
For the system using TC for PTP Mode and PTP Over UDP/
IPv4 for the Transparent Mode, PTP Profile should be set to
IEEE 1588v2.
G.8275.1 PTP Boundary Clock or Transparent Clock operates in

compliance with ITU-T G.8275.1 profile.
G.8265.1 Slave-Only Ordinary Clock operates in compliance with ITU-

T G.8265.1 profile (fixed.)

Table 12-3 PTP Mode Setting Parameters (2 of 2)
Transport Mode PTP over Ethernet For BC and TC, Transport Mode is fixed to PTP over
Ethernet, which operates in the mode according to the
IEEE1588-2008 Annex F.
PTP over UDP / IPv4 For SOOC, Transport Mode is fixed to PTP over UDP / IPv4.
Communication Multicast For Boundary Clock mode, the Communication Mode is

Mode fixed to Multicast traffic, which operates in the mode according
to the IEEE 1588-2008 Annex F.
Unicast For Slave-Only Ordinary Clock, the Communication Mode

is fixed to Unicast traffic.
Multicast Type Non Forwardable Select the Multicast Destination Address to use, which should
[01:80:c2:00:00:0e] be associated with that of the opposing site equipment.
[default: Forwardable]
Forwardable
[01:1b:19:00:00:00]
then click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
7. Step 2 PTP Detail Setting option window appears. Assign the appropriate
value to each parameter:
Figure 12-13 Step 2 PTP Detail Setting Option Window

Table 12-4 PTP Detail Setting Parameters
Clock Model PTP Only Not user-changeable: When PTP Mode is SOOC, and the
PTP Profile (see Table 12-3 PTP Mode Setting
Parameters)selects IEEE1588v2 or G8265.1, this option is
fixed to PTP Only.
Combined Not user-changeable: When PTP Profile (see Table 12-3

NE CLK PTP Mode Setting Parameters) is G.8275.1, this option is
fixed to Combined NE CLK.
Domain Number 0 to 127 Specify PTP Domain Number that should be associated with
that of the opposing site equipment. [default: 0]
4 to 23 When PTP Profile is G.8265.1, the available numbers are

limited within 4 to 23 in compliance with G.8265.1.
24 to 43 When PTP Profile is G.8275.1, the available numbers are

limited within 24 to 43 in compliance with G.8275.1.
PTP Priority Priority 1 Value 0 to 255 Specifies the priority to PTP packet, which should be associ-
ated with that of opposing site equipment. [default: 128]
Priority 2 Value 0 to 255  When PTP Profile is G.8265.1, both Priority 1 Value and
Priority 2 Value are fixed to 128.
 When PTP Profile is G.8275.1, Priority 1 Value is fixed to
128 in compliance with G.8275.1.
Local Priority 1 to 255 The setting of Local Priority is available only when the PTP
(Clock ) Value Profile is G.8275.1. [default: 128]
DSCP 0 to 63 Specify the DSCP value according to the network configura-

tion to use. This option is voided when Transport Mode
selects PTP over Ethernet. [default: 46]
PTP Hold Off Time 1 to 86400 Specifies the value of Holdoff Timer, which is a period to
release the Holdover state when the PTP function recovers
from the locked state. [unit: second]
PTP WTR Timer Value 1 to 86400 Specify the wait-to-restore period to carry out the Master
switching. [unit: second]
proceed.
The PTP Mode Setting window updates the PTP Parameters information.



rebooted when parameter(s) is/are changed.

12.4.2 Add/Modify PTP Logical Interface
NOTE: The maximum number of the Logical Interfaces to register differ depending
on the specified PTP Message Rate value. Contact NEC for the further
information.
Procedure 12-4
3. Click the reference number in the PTP Logical Interface option box:
 When the PTP Profile of the target is set to G.8265.1, the available object to add/
modify is No. 01 only.
click
PTP Logical Interface Setting option window of the selected number

appears.


Figure 12-17 PTP Logical Interface Setting Option Window
Table 12-5 PTP Logical Interface Setting Parameters (1 of 2)
Interface Name (text field) Name the interface to register.
IP Address x.x.x.x Enter the IP Address. This option is voided when Transport
Mode selects PTP over Ethernet.
Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Enter the Subnet Mask address. This option is voided when
Transport Mode selects PTP over Ethernet.
CoS 0 to 7 Specify the Class of Service value.
VLAN ID
Enable (radio button) (available VLAN IDs) Select a VLAN ID to enable. Select VLANs that have not
been assigned to the In-band Management VLANs.
Physical Port
Used (radio button) (available Port items.) Automatically selects an ETH Port number from the ports
that are associated with VLANs. When the PTP Mode is
PTP Over UDP/IPv4 (see 12.4.1 Modify PTP Mode), this
option is disabled.

Table 12-5 PTP Logical Interface Setting Parameters (2 of 2)
PTP Message Rate
Sync Message 8, 16, 32, 64, 128 [unit: fps]  When PTP Profile selects G.8275.1, the
values for these options are fixed; not
Delay_Req Message 8, 16, 32, 64, 128 [unit: fps] user-changeable.
Announce Message 0.5, 1, 2, 4 [unit: fps]  When PTP Profile selects IEEE1588v2 or
G8265.1, the recommended values for
Sync Message and Delay_Req Mes-
sage should be 64 or 128 (fps).
proceed.
7. The PTP Mode Setting window updates the PTP Logical Interface information.


12.4.3 Delete PTP Logical Interface
Procedure 12-5
3. Click the Delete PTP Logical Interface tool button.

Delete PTP Logical Interface tool button

Delete Interface option window of the selected number appears.
4. Select the interface number to remove, then click the OK button.

Figure 12-21 Delete Interface Option Window

proceed.
7. The PTP Mode Setting window updates the PTP Logical Interface information.



12.5 PTP Domain Setting

This option is available to adjust when the Transparent Mode is PTP over UDP /
IPv4, and Communication Mode is Unicast.
12.5.1 Add/Modify PTP Master Entry
Procedure 12-6
Equipment Clock/Synchronization Setting to select PTP Domain Setting.
The PTP Domain Setting window appears.
3. Click the reference number in the PTP Master List option box:
Figure 12-25 PTP Domain Setting Window
click
Master Setting option window of the selected number appears.


Figure 12-26 Master Setting Option Window
Table 12-6 Master Setting Parameters
PTP Master IP Address x.x.x.x Enter IP Address for PTP Master.
Master Name (text field) Enter the Master Name to register.
PTP Logical Interface (available Interface No.) Select a logical interface.
Local Priority (Master Entry) 1 to 5 The priority level of Master Entry can be
set between 1 to 5.
proceed.
The PTP Mode Setting window updates the PTP Logical Interface
information.



12-24/END Set Equipment Clock and Synchronization
12.5.2 Delete PTP Master Entry
Procedure 12-7
3. Click the Delete PTP Master Entry tool button.

Delete PTP Master Entry tool button
4. Delete PTP Master Entry option window of the selected number appears. Select
the interface number to remove, then click the OK button.
Figure 12-30 Delete PTP Master Entry Option Window


proceed.
7. The PTP Mode Setting window updates the PTP Master List information.


Assign Orderwire Channel 13-1
13. Assign Orderwire Channel
13.1 Overview
Use the following procedures to assign the Orderwire Channel. The Orderwire
Channel assignment is available for either protected (SW GRP, XIPC GRP) or
unprotected (1+0) MODEMs.
13.2 Assign Orderwire Channel

Procedure 13-1
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand SC/OW
Setting to select OW Setting. The OW Setting window appears.
3. Click the (MODEM) link. Following example selects XPIC GRP:
Figure 13-1 OW Setting Window
click
OW Setting (MODEM) option window appears.

13-2/END Assign Orderwire Channel
4. Set the appropriate usage:

Figure 13-2 OW Setting Option Window
Table 13-1 OW Setting (MODEM) Parameters
OW Use DSC Used Enables the use of OW Channel on the selected Card/Group.
Not Used Disables the use of OW Channel on the selected Card/Group.
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

7. The OW Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed

information.
Figure 13-4 OW Setting Window

Assign Alarm/AIS Settings 14-1
14. Assign Alarm/AIS Settings
14.1 Overview
Use the following procedures to configure the alarm severity, colors, and the relevant
settings of AIS events.
Correlation Settings
Users can modify the conditions to mask alarms (if displaying/clearing alarms on
LCT or LED).
Alarm Severity Setting

Users can modify the severity level of each alarm, such as critical, major, minor,
and warning, reported by iPASOLINK VR.
AIS Setting
Users can enable/disable AIS outputs, specify the conditions to output AIS, and set
delay time that is a period before outputting AIS.
BER Threshold Setting

Specify the threshold of BER alarm of (High/Low)/STM-1 MUX input and E-BER/
SD.

14-2 Assign Alarm/AIS Settings
14.2 Correlation Settings

Procedure 14-1
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then its submenu Alarm/
AIS Setting to select Correlation Setting. The Correlation Setting window
appears.
Figure 14-1 Correlation Setting Window
Modify tool button
4. Correlation Setting option window appears. Set the appropriate polarity:

Figure 14-2 Correlation Setting Option Window

Table 14-1 Correlation Setting Parameters
Alarm Correlation On Masks the lower level alarms.
Off Releases the lower level alarms.

7. The Correlation Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.
Figure 14-4 Correlation Setting Window

14.3 Alarm Severity Setting

Using the following procedure, alarm severity levels can be assigned to conditions
that iPASOLINK has.
Procedure 14-2
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Alarm/AIS
Setting to select Alarm Severity Setting. The Alarm Severity Setting window
appears.
3. Click the target object tab to select, and click the Modify tool button:
Figure 14-5 Alarm Severity Setting Window — MODEM Tab
Modify tool button click a tab
Alarm Severity Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the severity level by selecting the level from the Alarm Status drop-
down list, then click the OK button.
Figure 14-6 Alarm Severity Setting Option Window (Example: ODU)
Table 14-2 Alarm Status Values (Severity Levels)
Parameter Value Description (Intended Condition)
(Alarm Item) Critical A service-affecting condition that requires an immediate corrective action.
Major A service-affecting condition that requires an urgent corrective action.
Minor An existence of non-service-affecting failure that should take a corrective

action to prevent more serious service-affecting failure.
Warning A potential or impending service affecting failure. Action should be taken to

further diagnose (if necessary), and correct the problem in order to prevent
more serious service affecting failure.
Table 14-3 Alarm Severity Setting — ODU
ODU Alarm Item Default State Your Assignment
ODU Alarm Major
TX Power Major
TX Input Major
RX Level Major
ODU CPU / Cable Open Major
LO REF Minor
ODU Power Supply Major
Type Mismatch Major

Table 14-4 Alarm Severity Setting — MODEM
MODEM Alarm Item Default State Your Assignment
LOF Major
Frame ID Major
High BER Major
Low BER Minor
Early Warning Warning
MOD Major
IF Cable Short Major
L2SYNC Loss Major
RDI Warning
UAE Warning
Unlocked Major
XIF Major
XPIC Mode Mismatch Major
XPIC Pair Mute Mode Mismatch Minor
Delay Equalizer Setting Mismatch Major
Communication FAIL Major
Unequipped Major
TDM/AMR Range Mismatch Major
Compression Setting Mismatch Major
Radio Traffic Aggregation Setting Mismatch Major
Module Major
TX Bus Error Major
RX Bus Error Major
Type Mismatch Major
MODEM Power Supply Alarm Major
Radio Transparent Clock Setting Mismatch Major
Radio Transmission Mode Mismatch Major

Table 14-5 Alarm Severity Setting — Main Card
Card Type Mismatch Minor
Firmware Version Mismatch Minor
DB Mismatch Major
Software Key Equip Serial Mismatch Major
Main Card Alarm Major
Main Card CPU Alarm Major
Temperature Minor
PPS Fail Major
Bus Error Major
SBY TX Bus Error Major
SBY RX Bus Error Major
SBY Communication FAIL (TERM) Major
LTI Major
EXT CLK Loop Major
CLK FAIL Minor
CLK Drift Minor
SSM FAIL Minor
License Mismatch Major
EXT CLK LOS Minor
EXT CLK AIS Minor
EXT CLK LOF Major
Loss Sync Major
Loss Announce Major
Unusable Major
CLK Card Unequipped Major
CLK Card Type Mismatch Major

Table 14-6 Alarm Severity Setting — FAN
FAN FAIL Major
Unequipped Major
Table 14-7 Alarm Severity Setting — PS
Power Supply Major
Unequipped Major
Table 14-8 Alarm Severity Setting — TCN (1 of 2)
RF OFS Major
RF BBE Major
RF ES Major
RF SES Major
RF SEP Major
RF UAS Major
RS OFS Major
RS BBE Major
RS ES Major
RS SES Major
RS SEP Major
RS UAS Major
DMR RS OFS Major
DMR RS BBE Major
DMR RS ES Major
DMR RS SES Major
DMR RS SEP Major

Table 14-8 Alarm Severity Setting — TCN (2 of 2)
DMR RS UAS Major
MS BBE Major
MS ES Major
MS SES Major
MS SEP Major
MS UAS Major
E1 CV (E1 Card) Major
RX Level (MIN) Major
SFP TX Power Major
SFP RX Power Major
IDU Temperature (MAX) Major
RX Drop Events Major
RX Undersize Pkts Major
RX Fragments Major
RX CRC Alignment Errors Major
RX Oversize Pkts Major
TX Collisions Major

Table 14-9 Alarm Severity Setting — STM-1
MS AIS Major
NS RDI Major
AU AIS Major
AU LOP Major
HP UNEQ Major
HP TIM Major
HP PLM Major
HP RDI Major
LOM Major
SFP Type Mismatch Major
SFP Removed Major
STM-1 LOS Major
TF Major
RS LOF Major
RS TIM Major
RS EXC Major
RS DEG Minor
TU AIS Major
TU LOP Major
LP UNEQ Major
LP RDI Major
LP PLM Major
Module Major
Unequipped Major
Type Mismatch Major
TX Bus Error Major
RX Bus Error Major

Table 14-10 Alarm Severity Setting — E1

Module Major
Unequipped Major
Type Mismatch Major
Usage Error Minor
E1 LOS Major
E1 AIS Major
TX Bus Error Major
RX Bus Error Major
Table 14-11 Alarm Severity Setting — ETH

ETH-OAM LOC Critical
ETH-OAM RDI Critical
ETH-OAM Mismerge Critical
ETH-OAM Unexpected MEP Critical
Link OAM Down Critical
Remote Link Fault Critical
Remote Dying Gasp Critical
Remote Critical Event Critical
LAN Link Critical
ETH LOS Critical
ETH TF Critical
ETH LF Critical
ETH RF Critical
SFP Type Mismatch Critical
SFP Removed Critical
Module Critical
Communication FAIL Critical
Unequipped Critical
Type Mismatch Critical
TX Bus Error Critical
RX Bus Error Critical

Table 14-12 Alarm Severity Setting — MSE
Unequipped Major
Type Mismatch Major
Module Major
TX Bus Error Major
RX Bus Error Major
TDM Buffer Underrun Major
Table 14-13 Alarm Severity Setting — TERM
Module Major
Unequipped Major
Type Mismatch Major
RX Bus Error Major
Table 14-14 Alarm Severity Setting — MPLS-TP
MPLS-TP OAM LOC Major
MPLS-TP OAM RDI Major
MPLS-TP OAM Mismerge Major
MPLS-TP OAM Unexpected MEP Major
MPLS-TP APS Protocol Error Major
See the Maintenance manual also for alarms that iPASOLINK can report,
and their meanings.


7. The Alarm Severity Setting window updates the information. Verify the
Figure 14-8 Alarm Severity Setting Window

14.4 AIS Setting

Procedure 14-3
Setting to select AIS Setting. The AIS Setting window appears.

Figure 14-9 AIS Setting Window
Modify tool button
AIS Setting option window appears.

4. Set the appropriate polarity, then click the OK button.

Figure 14-10 AIS Setting Option Window
Table 14-15 AIS Setting Parameters
AIS Activation Condition LOF + High BER Sends AIS by receiving LOF and High BER alarms.
LOF Sends AIS by receiving LOF signal only.
AIS Generated Report Report Reports the event of generated AIS.
Not Report Not to report the event of generated AIS.
AIS Received Report Report Reports the event of receiving AIS.
Not Report Not to report the event of receiving AIS.
AIS Received Condition Alarm Treats an event of receiving AIS as an alarm.
Status Treats an event of receiving AIS as no alarm (event).

The AIS Setting window updates the information.


Figure 14-12 AIS Setting Window

14.5 BER Threshold Setting

Use the following procedures to specify the threshold of BER alarm of (High/Low)/
STM-1 MUX input and E-BER/SD.
14.5.1 MODEM (1+0) or MODEM SW GRP (1+1)
Procedure 14-4
Setting to select BER Threshold Setting. The BER Threshold Setting
window appears.
3. Click the desired SW GRP or MODEM link:

Figure 14-13 BER Threshold Setting Window
click
4. BER Threshold Setting (MODEM) option window appears. Assign the

appropriate settings, then click the OK button.
Figure 14-14 BER Threshold Setting (MODEM) Option Window

Table 14-16 BER Threshold Setting (MODEM) Parameters
High BER 1E-3 Specifies the High BER Threshold of Microwave.
1E-4
1E-5
Low BER 1E-6 Specifies the Low BER Threshold of Microwave.
1E-7
1E-8
1E-9
proceed.
6. The BER Threshold Setting window updates the information. Verify the

14.5.2 MODEM (1+0 XPIC)
Procedure 14-5
window appears.
3. Click the desired STM1-A link:

click
4. BER Threshold Setting (STM1 A) option window appears. Assign the

Figure 14-18 BER Threshold Setting (STM1-A) Option Window

Table 14-17 BER Threshold Setting (MODEM) Parameters

No. 1 High BER 1E-3 Specifies the High BER Threshold of Microwave for
Master side MODEM Card.
1E-4
1E-5
Low BER 1E-6 Specifies the Low BER Threshold of Microwave for
Master side MODEM Card.
1E-7
1E-8
1E-9
No. 2 High BER 1E-3 Specifies the High BER Threshold of Microwave for
Slave side MODEM Card.
1E-4
1E-5
Low BER 1E-6 Specifies the Low BER Threshold of Microwave for
Slave side MODEM Card.
1E-7
1E-8
1E-9
5. Information dialog box appears. Click OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

14.5.3 STM1-A
Procedure 14-6
window appears.
3. Click the desired STM1-A link:

click
4. BER Threshold Setting (STM1 A) option window appears. Assign the

Figure 14-22 BER Threshold Setting (STM1-A) Option Window

14-22/END Assign Alarm/AIS Settings
Table 14-18 BER Threshold Setting (STM1-A) Parameters
RS-EXC 1E-3 Specifies the threshold value to detect Regenerator

Section Signal Excessive BER condition.
1E-4
1E-5
RS-DEG 1E-6 Specifies the threshold value to detect Regenerator

Section Signal Degrade condition.
1E-7
1E-8
1E-9
proceed.

Assign PMON/RMON Settings 15-1
15. Assign PMON/RMON Settings
15.1 Overview
Use the following procedures to set the relevant configuration of PMON (except
Ethernet port) and RMON (Ethernet port), including threshold values.
The PMON/RMON Setting provides the following menus:
PMON Threshold Setting

Threshold setting of PMON (except Ether port).
RMON Threshold Setting

Threshold setting of RMON (Ether port).
 Other Threshold Settings

Settings of TCN Level for RX Level, SFP Optical Power, and Temperature
threshold.
VLAN Counter Setting

Adding VLAN Counter (VLAN Counter Report) and Shaper Group Counter.
iPASOLINK VR Release 1.5 does not support this option.
LSP Counter Setting

Adding LSP Counter (LSP Counter Report) to monitor the Label Switched Paths.
15.2 PMON Threshold Setting

PMON/RMON Threshold values can be set to the following objects:
Main Card
MODEM: for a slot (Card) that does not configure Switch Group.
SW GRP: for slots (Cards) that configure a Switch Group.
APS GRP
STM1-A
16E1-A

15-2 Assign PMON/RMON Settings
15.2.1 Main Card
Procedure 15-1
PMON/RMON Setting to select PMON Threshold Setting. The PMON
Threshold Setting window appears.
3. Click a tab to select MODEM or SW GRP (for protected MODEM), then click
the Modify tool button.
Figure 15-1 PMON Threshold Setting Window
Modify tool button

click a tab
PMON Threshold Setting RF - MODEM or RF - SW GRP option window

appears.

4. Assign the appropriate settings, the click the OK button.

Figure 15-2 PMON Threshold Setting Option Window
Table 15-1 PMON Threshold Setting (Main Card Tab) Parameters
E1 CV 15min Occur 0 to 4294967295 Specifies the threshold value to detect an E1 Code

CH# Violation for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 4294967295 Specifies the threshold value to clear the E1 Code

Violation for a 15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 4294967295 Specifies the threshold value to detect an E1 Code

Violation for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 4294967295 Specifies the threshold value to clear the E1 Code

Violation for a 1-Day period.


6. The PMON Threshold Setting window updates the information. Verify the

15.2.2 MODEM/SW GRP (Slot No.) Tab
Procedure 15-2
3. Click a tab to select MODEM or SW GRP (for protected MODEM), then click
the Modify tool button.
Modify tool button

click a tab
PMON Threshold Setting RF - MODEM or RF - SW GRP option window

appears.

4. Assign the appropriate settings, the click the OK button.

Figure 15-6 PMON Threshold Setting Option Window
Table 15-2 PMON Threshold Setting (MODEM / SW GRP Tab) Parameters (1 of 2)
RF BBE 15min Occur 0 to 1611000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF BBE
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 1611000 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF BBE for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 154656000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF BBE

condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 154656000 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF BBE

RF ES 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF ES

Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF ES for a

15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF ES

Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF ES

RF SES 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SES
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SES for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SES

Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SES


Table 15-2 PMON Threshold Setting (MODEM / SW GRP Tab) Parameters (2 of 2)
RF SEP 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SEP
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SEP for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SEP

Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SEP

RF UAS 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF UAS
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF UAS for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF UAS

Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF UAS

RF OFS 15mintes Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF OFS
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF OFS for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF OFS

Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF OFS

proceed.
6. Another Information dialog box appears. Clicking the OK button logs out the
session.

8. Open the PMON Threshold Setting window, and check if the values are
updated.

15.2.3 STM1-A/APS GRP (Slot No.) Tab
Procedure 15-3
3. Click the desired STM1-A or APS GRP tab, then click Modify tool button.
Figure 15-10 PMON Threshold Setting Window (example: STM-1 Through)
Modify DMR RS tool button

click a tab
Modify RS tool button
DMR - APS GRP or RS - APS GRP option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate settings, then click the OK button:

Figure 15-11 DMR Option Window (example: STM1-A)
DMR — STM1-A (Through) / APS GRP
Table 15-3 PMON Threshold Setting (DMR - STM1-A /APS GRP Tab) Parameters (1 of 2)

DMR RS BBE 15min Occur 0 to 16777215 Specifies the threshold value to detect a DMR
RS BBE condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 16777215 Specifies the threshold value to clear the DMR
RS BBE for a 15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 1610612640 Specifies the threshold value to detect a DMR
RS BBE condition for a 1-Day period.
RS BBE condition for a 1-Day period.
DMR RS ES 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect a DMR
RS ES condition for a 15-Minute period.
RS ES for a 15-minute period.
RS ES condition for a 1-Day period.
RS ES condition for a 1-Day period.
DMR RS SES 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect a DMR
RS SES condition for a 15-Minute period.
RS SES for a 15-minute period.
RS SES condition for a 1-Day period.
RS SES condition for a 1-Day period.

Table 15-3 PMON Threshold Setting (DMR - STM1-A /APS GRP Tab) Parameters (2 of 2)

DMR RS SEP 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect a DMR
RS SEP condition for a 15-Minute period.
RS SEP for a 15-minute period.
RS SEP condition for a 1-Day period.
RS SEP condition for a 1-Day period.
DMR RS UAS 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect a DMR
RS UAS condition for a 15-Minute period.
RS UAS for a 15-minute period.
RS UAS condition for a 1-Day period.
RS UAS condition for a 1-Day period.
DMR RS OFS 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect a DMR
RS OFS condition for a 15-Minute period.
RS OFS for a 15-minute period.
RS OFS condition for a 1-Day period.
RS OFS condition for a 1-Day period.
RS — STM1-A (Through/Channelized) / APS GRP

Table 15-4 PMON Threshold Setting (RS - STM1-A /APS GRP Tab) Parameters (1 of 2)
RS BBE 15min Occur 0 to 1611000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF BBE

for a 15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 154656000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF BBE



Table 15-4 PMON Threshold Setting (RS - STM1-A /APS GRP Tab) Parameters (2 of 2)
RS ES 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF ES




RS SES 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SES

1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SES


RS SEP 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SEP

1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SEP


RS UAS 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF UAS

1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF UAS


RS OFS 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF OFS

1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF OFS



MS — STM1-A (Channelized) / APS GRP

Table 15-5 PMON Threshold Setting (MS - STM1-A/APS GRP Tab) Parameters
MS BBE 15min Occur 0 to 16777215 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF

BBE condition for a 15-Minute period.

1day Occur 0 to 1610612640 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF

BBE condition for a 1-Day period.

MS ES 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF ES




MS SES 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF

SES condition for a 15-Minute period.

SES condition for a 1-Day period.

MS SEP 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF

SEP condition for a 15-Minute period.


SEP condition for a 1-Day period.

MS UAS 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF

UAS condition for a 15-Minute period.


UAS condition for a 1-Day period.


proceed.

15.2.4 16E1-A (Slot No.) Tab
Procedure 15-4
3. Click the desired 16E1-A tab to select, then click the Modify tool button.
Modify tool button click a tab
E1CV — 16E1-A option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate settings:

Figure 15-15 RF - E1CV — 16E1-A Option Window
Table 15-6 PMON Threshold Setting (16E1-A) Parameters
15min/1day Occur 0 to 4294967295 Specifies the threshold value to detect an

alarm condition.
Recover 0 to 4294967295 Specifies the threshold value to clear the

alarmed condition.

The PMON Threshold Setting window updates the information.



15.3 RMON Threshold Setting

Procedure 15-5
PMON/RMON Setting to select RMON Threshold Setting. The RMON

Figure 15-18 RMON Threshold Setting Window
Modify tool button
RMON Threshold Setting option window appears.


Figure 15-19 RMON Threshold Setting Option Window
Table 15-7 RMON Threshold Setting Parameters
RX Drop Events 15 minutes 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX Drop
Event condition for a 15-minute period.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX Drop

Events condition for a 1-day period.
RX Undersize Pkts 15 minutes 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX

Undersize Pkts condition for a 15-minute period.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX

Undersize Pkts condition for a 1-day period.
RX Fragments 15 minutes 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX

Fragments condition for a 15-minute period.

Fragments condition for a 1-day period.
RX CRC Alignment 15 minutes 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX CRC
Errors Alignment Error for a 15-minute period.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX CRC

Alignment Error for a 1-day period.
RX Oversize Pkts 15 minutes 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX

Oversize Pkts condition for a 15-minute period.

Oversize Pkts condition for a 1-day period.
TX Collisions 15 minutes 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect a TX

collision for a 15-minute period.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specifies the threshold value to detect a TX

collision for a 1-day period.

proceed.
6. The RMON Threshold Setting window updates the information. Verify the
Figure 15-21 RMON Threshold Setting Window

15.4 Other Threshold Settings
15.4.1 RX Level TCN (Threshold Crossing Notification)
Procedure 15-6
PMON/RMON Setting to select Other Threshold Setting. The Other
3. Click the link of the target object. The example below selects XPIC GRP2
(MODEM) (Slot03/04):
Figure 15-22 Other Threshold Setting Window
click
4. Other Threshold Setting option window appears. Assign the appropriate

settings, then click the OK button:
Figure 15-23 Other Threshold Setting Option Window

Table 15-8 Other Threshold Setting Parameters
RX Level TCN Threshold –99 to –30 Specifies the threshold value to generate TCN
RX Level alarm. [unit: dBm]
proceed.

15.4.2 SFP Optical Power TCN (Threshold Crossing Notification)
Procedure 15-7
3. Click the link of the target object. The example below selects STM-1 (Slot 05)
Port 01:
click

settings, then click the OK button:

SFP TX Power TCN –40 to 8.1 Specifies the threshold value to generate TCN
Threshold SFP TX Power alarm. [unit: dBm]
SFP RX Power TCN –40 to 8.1 Specifies the threshold value to generate TCN
Threshold SFP RX Power alarm. [unit: dBm]
proceed.

15.4.3 Temperature Threshold
Procedure 15-8
3. Click the link of for IDU Temperature (MAX) Threshold [°C]:

click

value, then click the OK button:

IDU Temperature (MAX) 0 to 150 Specifies the maximum temperature for IDU to
Threshold generate the notification. [scale: Celsius
temperature scale ]
proceed.

15.5 VLAN Counter Setting

iPASOLINK VR Release 1.5 does not support this option.
15.5.1 VLAN Counter Select
15.5.1.1 Add VLAN Counter
Procedure 15-9
PMON/RMON Setting to select VLAN Counter Setting. The VLAN Counter
3. In the VLAN Counter Select tabbed page, click Add Counter tool button:
Figure 15-34 VLAN Counter Setting Window — VLAN Counter Select Tab
VLAN Counter Select tab
Add Counter tool button
VLAN Counter Setting — VLAN Counter Select (Add) option window

appears.


Figure 15-35 VLAN Counter Select (Add) Option Window
Table 15-11 VLAN Counter Select Parameters
Item (available card) Select a target card to specify.
Port (available port) Select a target port to specify.
Enable (radio button) Clicking the radio button enables to count the frames that
pass through the selected VLAN.
The VLAN Counter Setting window updates the information.


Figure 15-37 VLAN Counter Setting Window

15.5.1.2 Modify VLAN Counter
Procedure 15-10
3. In the VLAN Counter Select tabbed page, click the reference number of the
target VLAN Counter:
Figure 15-38 VLAN Counter Setting Window — VLAN Counter Select Tab
VLAN Counter Select tab
click
VLAN Counter Setting — VLAN Counter Select (Modify) option window

appears.


Figure 15-39 VLAN Counter Select (Modify) Option Window
Table 15-12 VLAN Counter Select Parameters



15.5.1.3 Delete VLAN Counter
Procedure 15-11
3. In the VLAN Counter Select tabbed page, click the Delete Counter tool
button:
Delete Counter tool button
4. The Delete VLAN Counter option window appears. Select a VLAN Counter No.
to be removed, then click the OK button:
Figure 15-43 Delete VLAN Counter Option Window

5. Click the OK button of the dialog box.

proceed.
7. The VLAN Counter Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.
15.5.2 Shaper Group Counter Select

NOTE: Shaper Group Counter is currently not available, which is to be

15.5.2.1 Add Shaper Group Counter
Procedure 15-12
3. In the Shaper Group Counter Select tabbed page, click Add Counter tool
button:
Figure 15-47 VLAN Counter Setting Window — Shaper Group Counter Select
Tab

Shaper Group Counter Select tab
VLAN Counter Setting — Shaper Group Counter Select (Add) option window
appears.


Figure 15-48 Shaper Group Counter Select (Add) Option Window
Table 15-13 Shaper Group Counter Select Parameters



15.5.2.2 Delete Shaper Group Counter
Procedure 15-13
3. In the Shaper Group Counter Select tabbed page, click the Delete Counter
tool button:
Figure 15-51 VLAN Counter Setting Window — Shaper Group Counter Select
Tab
4. The Delete Shaper Group Counter option window appears. Select a VLAN
Counter No. to be removed, then click the OK button:
Figure 15-52 Delete Shaper Group Counter Option Window


proceed.
7. The VLAN Counter Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.

15.6 LSP Counter Setting
15.6.1 Add LSP Counter
Procedure 15-14
PMON/RMON Setting to select LSP Counter Setting. The LSP Counter
3. Click Add Counter tool button:

Figure 15-56 LSP Counter Setting Window
LSP Counter Setting — LSP Counter Select (Add) option window appears.


Figure 15-57 LSP Counter Select (Add) Option Window
Table 15-14 LSP Counter Select Parameters
pass through the selected LSP.



15.6.2 Delete LSP Counter
Procedure 15-15
PMON/RMON Setting to select LSP Counter Setting. The LSP Counter
3. Click the Delete Counter tool button:

4. The Delete LSP Counter option window appears. Select a LSP Counter No. to
be removed, then click the OK button:
Figure 15-61 Delete LSP Counter Option Window

15-44/END Assign PMON/RMON Settings

proceed.
7. The VLAN Counter Setting window updates the information. Verify the

VR4 04 GGS-000393-06E NW-SYS-PROV NoRestriction PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VR4 04 GGS-000393-06E NW-SYS-PROV NoRestriction PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

VR4 04 GGS-000393-06E NW-SYS-PROV NoRestriction PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Submission Prohibited

NEC Group Internal Use Only

© 2015 – 2017 by NEC Corporation

1. OPERATE WebLCT 1-1

1.1 Conventions Used in this Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

2. LICENSE AND USER ACCOUNT 2-1

2.1 Setup Software License. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

IPASOLINK VR 4: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING GGS-000393-06E

2.1.1 Import Software License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

3. SECURITY MANAGEMENT 3-1

3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

GGS-000393-06E iPASOLINK VR 4: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING

3.1.5.2 Session Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

iPASOLINK VR 4: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING GGS-000393-06E

3.9 FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

4. EQUIPMENT SETUP 4-1

4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

5. NETWORK MANAGEMENT 5-1

5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

GGS-000393-06E iPASOLINK VR 4: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING

5.6.1 Routing Protocol Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

iPASOLINK VR 4: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING GGS-000393-06E

6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

7. Set MODEM Function 7-1

7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

8. Set ETH Function 8-1

8.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

GGS-000393-06E iPASOLINK VR 4: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING

8.5.2.2 Port Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47

iPASOLINK VR 4: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING GGS-000393-06E

8.9.2.4 Isolate UNI (VLAN-Based) LAG from NNI or

GGS-000393-06E iPASOLINK VR 4: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING

8.15.1 Add LLF Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-215

9. Set MPLS-TP Function 9-1

9.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

iPASOLINK VR 4: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING GGS-000393-06E

9.5.2 L2 Encapsulation Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

10. Set Cross Connection Using E1/STM-1 Port 10-1

10.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

11. Set PWE Function 11-1

11.1 Add New PWE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

GGS-000393-06E iPASOLINK VR 4: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING

11.3 Delete PWE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

12. Set Equipment Clock and Synchronization 12-1

12.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

13. Assign Orderwire Channel 13-1

13.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

14. Assign Alarm/AIS Settings 14-1

14.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

iPASOLINK VR 4: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING GGS-000393-06E

15. Assign PMON/RMON Settings 15-1

15.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

GGS-000393-06E iPASOLINK VR 4: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING

1. The information in this document is subject to change without prior notice.

2. Screenshots of WebLCT provided in this document are examples. Screenshot

iPASOLINK VR 4: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING GGS-000393-06E

This page is intentionally left blank.

GGS-000393-06E iPASOLINK VR 4: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING

1.1 Conventions Used in this Document